Home

PowerFlex® 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter

1. p db db Item Name Ul TU After connecting the embedded EtherNet IP adapter to the network and applying power to the drive refer to Start Up Status Indications on page 2 5 for possible start up status indications and their descriptions PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter Since the EtherNet IP adapter is embedded on the Main Control Board in the PowerFlex 755 drive the only required adapter installation is setting its IP address and connecting it to the network Topic Page Preparing for an Installation 2 1 Setting the IP Address Switches 2 2 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 2 4 Applying Power 2 4 Commissioning the Adapter 2 6 Preparing for an Installation Before installing the embedded EtherNet IP adapter e Read the EtherNet IP Performance and Application Guide publication ENET AP001 and EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual publication ENET INOOI e Understand IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches Much of EtherNet IP implicit I O messaging uses IP multicast including this embedded EtherNet IP adapter to distribute I O control data which is consistent with the CIP producer consumer model Historically most switches have treated multicast packets the same as broadcast
2. Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description DLink UINT Destination Link ID DLink UINT Destination Link ID DSta USINT Destination Station number DSta USINT Destination Station number DUser USINT Destination User number DUser USINT Destination User number SLink UINT Source Link ID SLink UINT Source Link ID SSta USINT Source Station number SSta USINT Source Station number SUser USINT Source User number SUser USINT Source User number CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for EXT STS USINT Extended Status not used all CMDs for all CMDs PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result params USINT parameters results USINT data The embedded EtherNet IP adapter supports the following PCCC command types CMD FNC Description 0x06 0x03 Identify host and some status OF 67 PLC 5 typed write OF 68 PLC 5 typed read OF 95 Encapsulate other protocol OF A2 SLC 500 protected typed read with 3 address fields OF AA SLC 500 protected typed write with 3 address fields OF Al SLC 500 protected typed read with 2 address fields OF AQ SLC 500 protected typed write with 2 address fields OF 00 Word range read OF 01 Word range write For more information rega
3. COP Copy File Source F103 0 Dest 8N 0 2 Length 2 COP Copy File Source N50 2 Dest 8N50 1 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N50 3 Dest N50 0 Length 1 Faad Singk Write Message 00 B3 0 r EEM EtherNet IP Explicit Message LEN 1 Control Block N14 0 DN5 Control Block Length 8 ER 5 Setup Screen Three COP Copy instructions are required to convert the 16 bit integer data table addresses N50 0 Least Significant Word and N50 1 Most Significant Word to a 32 bit REAL floating point data table address F103 0 for correct presentation The first COP instruction correctly writes the 32 bit REAL floating point value The second and third COP instructions swap the LSW and MSW PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 21 SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Write Single Parameter Figure 6 25 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens lt EEM Rung 42 4 N14 0 This Controller Channel T Size in Words Receive Data 0 Data Table Adde Meceive Datak Send Data Continuous Aun CO n Target Device Message Timeo x1 sec Transmiting ST 0 Sece Service Code Itext 53 Wating for Queus Space 7 Chass er dec Message Corisol Bits leote timed out T0 0 Send Data gt Awaiting Execution EW 6 Enc ERLO Done IDN 0 MuttiHogr Yes Enabled EN 0
4. Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT Speed in megabits per second Mbs 2 Get Interface Flags UDINT Bit Value 0 Link status 0 inactive 1 active 1 Duplex 0 half duplex 1 full duplex 2 to 31 Reserved 3 Get Physical Address USINT 6 MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX The first octet USINT 0 is on the left 4 Get Interface Counters STRUCT of UDINT Octets received UDINT Unicast packets received UDINT Non unicast packets received UDINT Inbound packets received but discarded UDINT Inbound packets with errors not discarded UDINT Inbound packets with unknown protocol UDINT Octets sent UDINT Unicast packets sent UDINT Non unicast packets sent UDINT Outbound packets discarded UDINT Outbound packets with errors PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Attribute ID 5 Access Rule Get Name Media Counters Data Type STRUCT of UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT UDINT EtherNet IP Objects C 37 Description RX Received TX Transmitted RX frames not having integral number of octets long RX frames not passing FCS check TX frames having one collision TX frames having multiple collisions Number of times of SQE test error message TX Frames delayed first attempt by busy medium Collisions detected later than 512 bit
5. 0x10 Instances Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device The total number of components can be read in Instance 0 Class Attribute 4 Instances Hex 0x0000 Ox3FFF Dec 0 16383 Device Example Host Drive 0 Description Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 Ox43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Component 1 0x4400 Ox47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 2 Drive Component 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 Port 2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 Ox53FF 20480 21503 Port 4 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 16385 Adapter Component 1 Port 5 0x5800 OxSBFF 22528 23551 Port 6 0x5C00 Ox5FFF 23552 24575 Port 7 0x6000 Ox63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 Ox6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 Ox6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 Ox73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 Ox77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 Ox7BFF 30720 31743 Class Attributes Access Rule Data Type USINT Port 14 Description 0x00 DPI Peripheral Family Code 0x90 PowerFlex 755 OxA0 20 750 Series Option Card OxFF HIM 1 Get Family Text STRING 16 Text identifying the dev
6. Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x67 103 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x4B No Yes Execute_PCCC 0x4C No Yes Execute_DH Instances Supports Instance 1 Class Attributes Not supported Instance Attributes Not supported Message Structure for Execute_PCCC PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Request Response Name DataType Description Name Data Type Description Length USINT Length of requestor ID Length USINT Length of requestor ID Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of Serial UDINT ASA serial number of Number requestor Number requestor Other Product Identifier of user task etc Other Product Identifier of user task etc Specific on the requestor Specific on the requestor CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code Not used for EXT_STS USINT Extended status Not used all CMDs for all CMDs PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result params USINT parameters results USINT data EtherNet IP Objects C 7 Message Structure for Execute_DH
7. major and minor revision is not available the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct database click either the Create Database bottom left of this screen See the information following this table for Web Update or Match Drive button on the descriptions of each button PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Box Electronic Keying Configuring the I O 4 7 Setting Compatible Module The Compatible Module setting for Electronic Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore ensure that you have set the correct revision in this screen Refer to the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Drive Rating The voltage and current rating of the drive If the drive rating is not listed the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct database click either the Create Database Web Update or Match Drive button on the bottom left of this screen See the information following this table for descriptions of each button Rating Options Selects the drive power output required for the application Special Types Reserved for future use Connection Parameters via Datalinks When selecting P
8. DINT My_PowerFlex_755_Drive l Data 1 My_PowerFlex_755_Drive l Data 2 My PowerFlex_755_Drive Data 3 DINT DINT DINT Pad Word Logic Status Speed Feedback DL To Net 01 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 4 EH My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 5 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 5 DINT DINT DINT DL To Net 02 DL To Net 03 DL To Net 04 My_PowerFlex_755_Drive l Data 7 1 DINT 4 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 8 EH My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 9 EH My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 10 DINT DINT DINT DLToNe05 DL To Net 06 DL To Net 07 DL To Net 08 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 11 Mp PoweiFlex_755_ Diivei Data 12 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 13 r TE DINT DINT DINT DL To Net 09 DL To Net 10 DL To Net 11 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 14 DINT My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 15 DINT EHEHEHE My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 15 My PowerFles 755 Drive l Data 17 j DINT DINT t DLToNeti2 DL To Net 13 DL To Net 14 DL To Net 15 Figure 5 6 ControlLogix Output Image for Generic Drive Profile Example F My PowerFlez 755 Drive l Data 18 Ladder Logic Program DINT DL To Net 16 amp Data Type EH My PowerFlex 755 Drive D My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data My PowerFlex 755 D rive D Data 0 t My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 1 AB ETHERNET
9. Setting Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write The controller type and command type for the controller to write the control timeout value to the drive Data Table Address 1 N20 0 An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written Size in Elements 1 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Data Table Address N42 3 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow Ethernet messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 25 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For details on setting the control timeout value and its function see N Files on page C 8 Creating PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net D
10. N20 58 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 09 DL From Net 09 MSW N20 59 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 10 DL From Net 10 LSW N20 60 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 10 DL From Net 10 MSW N20 61 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 11 DL From Net 11 LSW N20 62 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 11 DL From Net 11 MSW N20 63 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 12 DL From Net 12 LSW N20 64 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 12 DL From Net 12 MSW N20 65 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 13 DL From Net 13 LSW N20 66 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 13 DL From Net 13 MSW N20 67 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 14 DL From Net 14 LSW N20 68 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 14 DL From Net 14 MSW N20 69 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 15 DL From Net 15 LSW N20 70 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 15 DL From Net 15 MSW N20 71 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 16 DL From Net 16 LSW N20 72 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 16 DL From Net 16 MSW TIP Remember that most of the parameters in the drive being read written with the Datalinks are REAL floating point data types Therefore use a COP Copy instruction to convert the least significant
11. PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 3 2 Configuring the Adapter Using BOOTP By default the embedded EtherNet IP adapter is configured to set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address by using a BOOTP utility You can select from a variety of BOOTP utilities These instructions use Rockwell s BOOTP Server version 2 3 or higher a stand alone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP utilities with a graphical interface It is available from www ab com networks bootp html Refer to the Readme file and online Help for detailed directions and information TIP If desired you can disable BOOTP and configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address by setting adapter parameters For details see Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address on page 3 5 Configuring the Adapter Using BOOTP Server 1 Verify and note the adapter s hardware Ethernet Address MAC which will be used in Step 6 There are two ways to do this Use the HIM to scroll to Port 13 and access the embedded EtherNet IP adapter s DIAGNOSTIC folder screen Then scroll to Diagnostic Items 43 HW Addr 1 through 48 HW Addr 6 to view the adapter s hardware Ethernet Address MAC Remove the drive cover and locate the adapter s hardware Ethernet Address MAC label on the drive s Main Control Board Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Adapter Hardware
12. Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Setting the Data Rate Configuring the Adapter 3 7 Figure 3 9 Edit Gateway Cfg 1 HIM Screen Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg A Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder By default the adapter is set to autodetect so it automatically detects the data rate and duplex setting used on the network If you need to set a specific data rate and duplex setting the value of Parameter 50 Net Rate Cfg determines the Ethernet data rate and duplex setting that the adapter will use to communicate For definitions of data rate and duplex refer to the Glossary l Setthe value of Parameter 50 Net Rate Cfg to the data rate at which your network is operating Figure 3 10 Edit Net Rate Cfg HIM Screen Value Data Rate 0 Autodetect default 1 10Mbps Full 2 10Mbps Half 3 100Mbps Full 4 100Mbps Half TIP Auto detection of baud rate and duplex works properly only if the device usually a switch on the other end of the cable is also set to automatically detect the baud rate duplex If one device has the baud rate duplex hard coded the other device must be hard coded to the same settings 2 Resetthe adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC f
13. i MSG MG11 0 2 Elements This PLC 5 Conmurscation Command Data Table Address Size in Elemente Port Number Target Device Del Remove Hop Tu Aduiess Ty EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 78 DER Control Bits Ignore if timed s T0 n To be retried NR 0 Awaiting Execution Cwt 0 Continuous Run CO o Ero ER v Message done DN n Data I able Address Message Transmitting ST 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Error Enw CodefHex 0 Error Desenpton No ermes General Tab Box Setting This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read The controller type and command type for the controller to read data from the drive Data Table Address N20 1 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive Size in Elements 36 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Data Table Address 9 N45 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow Ethernet messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table a
14. 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 9 Click OK on the Module Definition screen to save the drive and adapter configuration and close the screen The drive s New Module screen reappears On the New Module screen click the Connection tab Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 Connection Screen E New Module Genera Connection Module info Port Configuration Dive Requested Packet Interval RPI 5 0 E ma 1 0 512 0 FOdnhiba Modde Mejor Faut On Controler E Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Faut Staus Lreabng In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 2 0 milliseconds or greater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices The Inhibit Module box when checked inhibits the module from communicating with the RSLogix 5000 project When the Major Fault on box is checked a major controller fault will occur when the module s connection fails while the controller is in the Run Mode For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault On boxes unchecked On the New Module screen click the Port Configuration tab Figure 4 12 Figure 4 12 Port Configuration Screen E New Module General Connection Module Into Port Configuration
15. Dive P Address Subnet Mask n n n n Gateway Address U U U 0 Status Creating PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 10 Configuring the I O 10 11 12 In the Port Configuration screen edit the following information Box Setting IP Address The IP address of the adapter that was already set in the General tab This field is not configurable grayed out Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask configuration setting of the network This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network for example 255 255 255 0 Gateway The Gateway Address configuration setting of the network This setting Address must match the setting of other devices on the network for example 10 91 100 1 Enable BootP When this box is checked BOOTP is enabled in the adapter and will ignore the IP address set in the General tab When unchecked the controller uses the set IP address This is another method to enable disable BOOTP in the adapter For this example leave this box unchecked Click Set to save the Port Configuration information which sets the corresponding offline Subnet Cfg x and Gateway Cfg x parameters in the adapter Click OK on the New Module screen The new node My_PowerFlex_755_Drive in this example now appears under the bridge My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you dou
16. General Tab Box Setting This Controller data for MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Read The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Since the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Read command type was selected to read data from the drive Data Table Address N20 1 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive Size in Elements 36 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address N45 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 1 An unused routing information file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For N File details see N Files on page C 8 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Co
17. Logic Bits 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description Run Ready 0 Not Ready to Run 1 Ready to Run x Active 0 Not Active 1 Active x Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward X Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward X Accelerating 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating x Decelerating 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating x Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 959 amp 960 1 Alarm X Fault 0 No Fault Par 952 amp 953 1 Fault x At Setpt Spd 0 Not at Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed x Manual 0 Manual Mode Not Active 1 Manual Mode Active X Spd Ref ID 0 00000 Reserved n E Auto Re ar RE D 00011 Auto Preset Speed 3 Par 573 00100 Auto Preset Speed 4 Par 574 x Spd ReflD 4 00101 Auto Preset Speed 5 Par 575 x o 00110 Auto Preset Speed 6 Par 576 00111 Auto Preset Speed 7 Par 577 01000 Reserved 01001 Reserved 01010 Reserved 01011 Reserved 01100 Reserved 01101 Reserved 01110 Reserved 01111 Reserved 10000 Man Port 0 10001 Man Port 1 10010 Man Port 2 10011 Man Port 3 10100 Man Port 4 10101 Man Port 5 10110 Man Port 6 10111 Reserved 11000 Reserved 11001 Reserved 11010 Reserved 11011 Reserved 11100 Reserved 11101 Man Port 13 Emb ENET 11110 Man
18. Note that when selecting the data to be written to RAM the data will be lost if the drive loses power For supported classes instances and attributes refer to Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 007 Output Current in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Figure 6 21 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Read Single ael Single Read Message B3 0 EEM f EtherNetIP Explicit Message CEN gt 19 Control Block NI3 0 CDN gt Control Block Length 58 CER gt Setup Screen COP Copy File Source N40 0 Dest N40 3 Length 1 COP Copy File Source 8N40 1 Dest N40 2 Length 1 r COP Copy File Source N40 2 Dest F102 0 Length 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 19 Three COP Copy instructions are required to convert the 16 bit integer data table addresses N40 0 Least Significant Word and N40 1 Most Significant Word to a 32 bit REAL floating point data table address F102 0 for correct presentation The first two COP instructions swap the LSW and MSW and the third COP instruction correctly presents the 32 bit REAL floating point value SLC 500 Formatti
19. Speed Reference Status Active Status At Speed Status Faulted Status Forward Status Ready Status Reverse Figure 5 8 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using Generic Drive Profiles for Logic Status Feedback My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 0 0 Status Ready JE C2 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 0 1 Status Active JE C2 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 0 3 Status Forward j C2 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 0 3 Status Reverse J E C gt My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 0 7 Status Faulted Co My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 0 8 Status At Speed H C COP Copy File Source My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 1 Dest Speed Feedback Length 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 5 12 Using the I O Figure 5 9 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using Generic Drive Profiles for Logic Command Reference Command_Stop My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 0 O 7 Command Start My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 0 1 C Command Jog My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 0 2 JE C5 Command Clear Faults My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 0 3 AS ut Command Forward Reverse My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 0 4 EG Command Forward Reverse My_PowerFlex_755_Drive O Data 0 5 JE C COP Copy File Source Speed_Reference Dest My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 1 Length 1 Example Datalink Data The Datalink data used in
20. elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 15 Not used 4 Get International Read Full Struct of STRINGN International timer text STRUCT Timer value BOOL 16 Timer descriptor 5 Get International Timer Text STRINGN Name of this timer 6 Get Clock Status BOOL 32 Identifies clock status PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 27 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 8 Get Set Number of Leap Seconds INT Identifies the current number of Leap Seconds 9 Get Clock Options BOOL 32 Identifies the optional functionality available in the device s System Clock 10 Get Set Clock Options Enable BOOL 32 Identifies which of the clock s options are enabled PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 28 EtherNet IP Objects Host DPI Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal Ox9F 159 To access Device parameters use the DPI Parameter Object Class Code 0x93 Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Reserved 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x4000 Ox43FF 16384 17407 Adapter
21. lt gt J E C2 COP Copy File Source Speed_Reference Dest My PoworFlox 755 Drivo O Roforonco Length 1 Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile all versions Adapter Parameter Settings for ControlLogix Example These adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Adapter Parameter Value Description 01 DL From Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 02 DL From Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 03 DL From Net 03 1535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 04 DL From Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 05 DL From Net 05 1537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 06 DL From Net 06 1538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 07 DL From Net 07 1539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 08 DL From Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 09 DL From Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 10 DL From Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 11 DL From Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 12 DL From Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 13 DL From Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 14 DL From Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 15 DL From Net 15 576 Points to
22. 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core E Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 750COM UMOOLA EN P January 2009 Copyright 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
23. 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 Ox6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 Ox73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 Ox77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Class Attributes Access Rule Get Name Class Revision Port 14 Data Type UINT 16385 Adapter Diagnostic Item 1 Description 1 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of diagnostic items in the device 3 Get ENUM Offset UINT DPI ENUM object instance offset PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 24 EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Info STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 16 CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value UINT Pad Word UINT Pad Word STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset UDINT Link source of the value 0 no link STRING 16 Always zero 0 Parameter name 1 Get Set Value Various Diagnostic item value 2 Get International Diagnostic Item Text Struct of STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 3 Get International Full Read All STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum CONTAINER Maximum CONTAINER _ Default UINT Pad wo
24. 5 to 31 Reserved 3 Set Configuration Control UDINT Bit Value 1 3 Startup configuration 0 Use configuration saved in NVS 1 Obtain configuration via BOOTP 2 Obtain configuration via DHCP 3 to 15 Reserved 4 DNS Enabled resolves host names by query to DNS server 5 to 31 Reserved PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 35 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 4 Get Physical Link Object STRUCT of UINT Path size Padded EPATH Path 5 Get Interface Configuration STRUCT of UDINT Adapter s IP address UDINT Adapter s subnet mask UDINT Adapter s gateway address UDINT Primary name server UDINT Secondary name server STRING Default domain name 6 Get Host Name STRING Host name when using DHCP PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 36 EtherNet IP Objects Ethernet Link Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF6 246 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x4C No Yes Get_and_Clear Instances The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 UINT The revision of this object Instance Attributes
25. 6 Boot Updated The boot code in the adapter was updated 7 24 Reserved 25 DPI Manual Reset The adapter was reset 26 28 Reserved 29 NetLink Up An Ethernet link is available for the adapter 30 NetLink Down The Ethernet link was removed from the adapter 31 Net Dup Address The adapter uses the same IP address as another device on the network 32 Net Comm Fault The adapter detected a communications fault on the network 33 Net Sent Reset The adapter received a reset from the network 34 NetlO Close An I O connection from the network to the adapter was closed 35 Netldle Fault The adapter is receiving idle packets from the network 36 NetlO Open An I O connection from the network to the adapter has been opened 37 NetlO Timeout An I O connection from the network to the adapter has timed out 38 NetlO Size Err The adapter received an incorrectly sized I O packet 39 PCCCIO Close The device sending PCCC Control messages to the adapter has set the PCCC Control Timeout to zero 40 X PCCCIO Open The adapter has begun receiving PCCC Control messages the PCCC Control Timeout was previously set to a non zero value 41 PCCCIO Timeout The adapter has not received a PCCC Control message for longer than the PCCC Control Timeout 42 MsgCtrl Open The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a non zero value allowing control messages to be sent to the adapter 43 Msg Ctrl Cl
26. Appendix A Appendix B Using the I O About VO Messaging iuo got secet rbd exor e Rob Rb rdc dn 5 1 Understanding the I O Image seeeeeeeee II 5 2 Using Logic Command Status sseeseeeeeeeeee eee 5 4 Using Reference Feedback 0 0 eee teenies 5 4 Using Datalinks wi ces ee bei eed he ee REA ET ERE bee ee 5 5 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 0 00 00 c eee ee eee 5 6 ControlLogix Example 0 cee ene eens 5 6 PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Example 0 005 5 14 Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging lee 6 1 Performing Explicit Messages 0 0 cece cece eee 6 2 ControlLogix Example 0 0 cece eee 6 3 PUC 5 Example ede his dad a ada eee da eer a e ecc ice E 6 14 SLC 500 Exampl i ecrit Rae aa a ERES CERE ck dba aos eds 6 18 MicroLogix 1100 Example ssseeeeeeeee dura aia 6 32 Troubleshooting Understanding the Status Indicators llle 7 1 BNET Status Indicator sce ccs dae MR ea ete e ex a e see le e aed 7 2 LINK Status Indicator accepere e epe Ga eke eee be eae 7 2 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 2 0 0 0 eee eee tenes 7 3 Viewing and Clearing Events 0 0 ccc es 7 5 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Accessing the Adapter Web Home Page 0 0 00 cece eee eee 8 1 Process Display Pop up Window 0 0 cece ee eee eee eens 8 4 TCP IP Configuration Web Page 0
27. DINT 18 DINT DINT My PowerFlex_755_Drive 0 Data 2 DINT Logic Command Description Speed Reference DL From Net 01 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 3 DINT DL From Net 02 EH My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 4 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 5 My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 5 DINT DINT DINT DL From Net 03 DL From Net 04 DL From Net 05 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 7 EH My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 9 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 3 DINT DINT DINT DL From Net 06 DL From Net 07 DL From Net 08 My PowerFlex_755_Drive 0 Data 10 DINT DL From Net 09 EH My PowerFle 755 Drive O Data 11 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 12 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 13 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 14 c My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 15 DINT DINT DINT DL From Net 10 DL From Net 11 DL From Net 12 DINT DINT My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 15 DINT DL From Net 13 DL From Net 14 DL From Net 15 My_PowerFlex_755_Drive 0 Data 17 DINT DL From Net 16 Using the I O 5 11 Program Tags To use the Controller tags that are automatically created you need to create the following Program tags for this example program Figure 5 7 ControlLogix Program Tags for Generic Drive Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Data Type Command Clear Faults 0 Command Forward Reverse Command Jog Command Start Command Stop Speed Feedback
28. DL To Net 06 538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 23 DL To Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 24 DL To Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 25 DL To Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 26 DL To Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 27 DL To Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 28 DL To Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 29 DL To Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 30 DL To Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 31 DL To Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 32 DL To Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 TIP The DL From Net xx parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter The DL To Net xx parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Creating RSLogix 500 v7 or higher Project To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Note that three messages need to be configured The timeout PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4
29. DLs To Net Act Displays the number of actual drive to controller Datalinks that the controller is using based on the I O connection opened by the controller BOOTP Configures the adapter to use BOOTP so that you can set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address with a BOOTP server When this parameter is disabled you must use the adapter parameters to set these addressing functions Net Addr Src Displays the source from which the adapter node address is taken This will be switches Parameters 40 43 IP Addr Cfg x or BOOTP It is determined by the settings of the octet switches on the adapter See Setting the IP Address Switches on page 2 2 for details IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Sets the bytes in the IP address 255 255 255 255 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 Set with Octet Switch on Drive Main Control Board Important To set the IP address using these parameters Parameter 36 BOOTP must be set to 0 Disabled Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Sets the bytes of the subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Important To set the subnet mask using these parameters Parameter 36 BOOTP must be set to 0 Disabled Adapter Parameters Details Default Value Type Default Minimum Maximum Type Default Minimum
30. N60 2 Least Significant Word and N60 3 Most Significant Word for the first parameter to a 32 bit REAL floating point data table address F104 0 for correct presentation The first two COP instructions swap PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 24 Using Explicit Messaging the LSW and MSW and the third COP instruction correctly presents the 32 bit REAL floating point value SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Figure 6 28 Custom Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens EEM N15 0 58 Elements General MAH Send Data Receive Data Fiom Device his SLESAN gt EEM N12 0 98 Elements General Mutiop Send Data Receive Data This Controller Message Corisol Bits Channel 1 loce i timed cut TOP 0 Size in Words Receive Dara o Send Date X Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Data Table Address Receive Datak enn SendDatet N Continuous Run CO n Enc ER 0 Target Device Done 10N 0 Message Timeout xt sec i Transmitting 5T E Muto fy Enabled EN 5 Sene Service Code thext 1 Waiting for Queue Space 6 Class hex eect 147 Instance hex deck o Amibure hex et fo Enor Code hes g Eno Ener Desciphon No enos The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a multiple read message Genera
31. PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers use a COP Copy instruction Figure 5 13 PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Command Reference Command Stop _ Drive Stop B3 37 N20 37 iE C 0 0 Command Start Drive Start B3 37 N20 37 jit C gt 1 1 Command Jog DriveJog B3 37 N20 37 2 3 B3 37 N20 37 J E amp 3 3 ien DH RE B3 37 N20 37 3t C 4 5 CPW Copy Word Source F13 1 Dest N20 39 Length 2 Important This ladder does not include logic for Datalinks However if Datalinks are required and they are a REAL floating point data type a data conversion must be used For MicroLogix 1100 controllers only use a CPW Copy Word instruction as shown in the example ladder For PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers use a COP Copy instruction PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P About Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use Explicit Messaging to configure and monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex 750 Series drive Topic Page About Explicit Messaging 6 1 Performing Explicit Messages 6 2 ControlLogix Example 6 3 PLC 5 Example 6 14 SLC 500 Example 6 18 MicroLogix 1100 Example 6 32 A A ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this public
32. Rockwell Automation Inc representatives are in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation Inc representative for e Sales and order support e Product technical training e Warranty support e Support service agreements Technical Product Assistance For technical assistance please review the information in Chapter 7 Troubleshooting first If you still have problems then access the Allen Bradley Technical Support web site at www ab com support abdrives or contact Rockwell Automation Inc The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Parameter names are shown in the format Parameter xx The Xx represents the parameter number The represents the parameter name for example Parameter 01 DL From Net Cfg 01 e Menu commands are shown in bold type face and follow the format Menu gt Command For example if you read Select File gt Open you should click the File menu and then click the Open command e The firmware release is displayed as FRN X xxx The FRN signifies Firmware Release Number The X is the major release number The xxx is the minor update number e RSLinx Classic version 2 52 RSLogix 5 version 7 20 RSLogix 500 version 7 20 and RSLogix 5000 version 16 were used for the screen shots in this manual Different versions of the software may differ in appearance and procedures PowerFlex 755 Drive
33. Scattered Read Request for this example 40 bytes but can be a different data type for this example a UDDT to handle conversions to parameter values that are a REAL data type PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 9 ControlLogix Example Scattered Read Request Data In this example we use the data structure in Figure 6 8 in the source tag named Scattered Read Request to read these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive 001 Output Frequency 007 Output Current 008 Output Voltage 009 Output Power and 011 DC Bus Volts Figure 6 8 Example Scattered Read Request Data Scaltered Read Request DINT IO Scattered Read Request U 1 DINT Parameter Number decimal Scallered Head Hequesl 1 0 DINI Pad Word Scattered Head Hequest 2 7 DINI Parameter Number decimal Scaltered Read Request 3 DINT Pad Ward Scaltered Read Request 4 DINT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 5 0 DINT Pad Word Scattered Read_Request 6 9 DINT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Reques 7 0 DINT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 9 11 DINT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 9 E C DINT Pad Word ControlLogix Example Scattered Read Response Data The Scattered Read Request message reads the multiple parameters and returns their values
34. e Disrupted Peer I O by using Parameter 56 Peer Flt Action e Disrupted explicit messaging for drive control via PCCC and the CIP Register Object by using Parameter 57 Msg Flt Action A ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Embedded adapter Parameters 54 Comm FIt Action 55 Idle Fit Action 56 Peer FIt Action and 57 Msg Flt Action respectively let you determine the action of the adapter and drive if I O communication is disrupted the controller is idle Peer I O is disrupted or explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected network cable controller in idle state or explicit message control disruption Changing the Fault Action Set the values of Parameters 54 Comm FIt Action 55 Idle Flt Action 56 Peer Flt Action and 57 Msg Fit Action to the desired responses Value Action Description 0 Fault The drive is faulted and stopped Default 1 Stop The drive is stopped but not faulted 2 Zero Data The drive is sent 0 for output data This does not command a stop 3 Hold Last The drive continues i
35. is used to provide a communication link between the computer network and controller RSLinx Classic requires its network specific driver to be configured before communications are established with network devices To configure the RSLinx driver 1 Start RSLinx and select Communications gt Configure Drivers to display the Configure Drivers screen 2 Inthe Available Driver Types box select EtherNet IP Driver and then click Add New to display the EtherNet IP Driver Selection screen 3 When the Add New RSLinx Driver screen appears type a name if desired and click OK to display the Configure driver screen 4 Depending on your application select either the browse local or remote subnet option and click OK The Configure Drivers screen reappears with the new driver in the Configured Drivers list Figure 4 1 Figure 4 1 Configure Drivers Screen with a Configured Driver Configure Drivers Available Driver Types EtherNet IP Driver Add New Jonhgured Drivers Name and Description Status AD ETHIP 1 A D Cthemet RUNNING Running 5 Click Close to close the Configure Drivers screen Leave RSLinx running PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 2 Configuring the I O ControlLogix Example 6 Verify that your computer recognizes the drive Select Communications gt RSWho and in the menu tree click the symbol next to t
36. word and most significant word values to a single floating point register Fx x You can use the controller data table addresses to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView etc to operate the drive and view its status you may want to create alternate controller data table addresses Table 5 E and Table 5 F and a ladder logic program that will pass that data to the data table addresses used for messaging Table 5 E Controller and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status Feedback Ladder Logic Program Controller Progam Description Data Table Description Data Table Address Address Drive Ready N20 1 0 Status Ready B3 1 0 Drive Active N20 1 1 Status Active B3 1 1 Actual Direction Forward XIO N20 1 3 Status Forward B3 1 3 Actual Direction Reverse XIC N20 1 3 Status Reverse B3 1 4 Drive Faulted N20 1 7 Status Faulted B3 1 7 Drive At Speed N20 1 8 Status At Speed B3 1 8 Speed Feedback N20 3 Speed Feedback B30 3 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using the I O 5 17 Table 5 F Program and Controller Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command Reference Ladder Logic Program Program Controller Description Data Table Description D
37. 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference Reference 1 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be wr
38. 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 16386 Adapter Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 OXABFF 18432 19455 Port2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 Port3 17408 Class Attributes HIM 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port4 17409 HIM Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 Port5 17410 HIM Parameter 2 Attributes 0x5800 OxSBFF 22528 23551 Port6 0x5C00 OxSFFF 23552 24575 Port7 0x6000 OX63FF 24576 25599 Port8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port9 0x6800 OXGBFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 OxGFFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 OX73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 Ox77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 OX7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password UINT 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum UINT Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum UINT Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter UINT First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revisio
39. 3 Speed Feedback LSW N20 4 Speed Feedback MSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 LSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 MSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 18 DL To Net 02 LSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 18 DL To Net 02 MSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 19 DL To Net 03 LSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 19 DL To Net 03 MSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 20 DL To Net 04 LSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 20 DL To Net 04 MSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 21 DL To Net 05 LSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 21 DL To Net 05 MSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 22 DL To Net 06 LSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 22 DL To Net 06 MSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 23 DL To Net 07 LSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 23 DL To Net 07 MSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 24 DL To Net 08 LSW N20 20 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 24 DL To Net 08 MSW N20 21 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 25 DL To Net 09 LSW N20 22 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 25 DL To Net 09 MSW N20 23 Value of parameter a
40. 3 selected Datalinks The Datalinks allocated for this cannot overlap with other assigned DL To Net 01 16 parameters DLs To Peer Act Displays the value of Parameter 87 DLs To Peer Cfg at the time the drive was reset This is the number of actual drive to peer Datalinks that the drive is expecting To Peer Period Sets the minimum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer Important Changes to this parameter are ignored when Parameter 91 To Peer Enable is 0 Off To Peer Skip Sets the maximum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer The value of Parameter 89 To Peer Period is multiplied by the value of this parameter to set the time Important Changes to this parameter are ignored when Parameter 91 To Peer Enable is 0 Off To Peer Enable Controls whether Peer I O output is operating A value of 0 Off turns off Peer I O output A value of 1 Cmd Ref overrides the settings in Parameters 31 DL To Net 15 32 DL To Net 16 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg and 77 DLs Fr Peer Act and automatically sends the drive s present Logic Command as Datalink 01 and Reference as Datalink 02 A value of 2 Custom enables Peer I O output using the Datalink count and settings provided by the user Adapter Parameters Details Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Default
41. 4 5 2 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting the adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Embedded adapter Parameters 54 Comm FIt Action 55 Idle Fit Action 56 Peer Flt Action and 57 Msg Flt Action let you determine the action of the adapter and drive if I O communication is disrupted the controller is idle Peer T O is disrupted or explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or a controller in idle state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists When a system is configured for the first time there may be unintended or incorrect machine motion Disconnect the motor from the machine or process during initial system testing ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc d
42. 5705 CPU 16K Men 5 U4 CPU 64K Men Series C FRN later 1747 L542C 5704 CPU 32K Mem Series C FRN later Communication settings Driver Processur Nude Reply Timeu Cthemet Who Aclive 1U Sec Assign a name for the processor In the list select a 1747 L55x type controller Then select the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application and click OK The RSLogix 500 project window appears Creating SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout 1 2 In the RSLogix 500 project window treeview under Program Files double click on LAD 2 Insert a ladder rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG WRITE 500CPU LOCAL Nxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example N10 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example N10 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC Nxx n 13 NXB XIC Nxx n 12 BND OTU Nxx n 15 where Xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example N10 0 for the message created in Step 2 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 4 32 Configuring the I O
43. 6 39 to store the response value 1 77 amps that was read from drive parameter 007 Output Current Figure 6 39 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File Data l ile 40 DER o 2 E 4 MicroLogix 1100 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Single Parameter A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 535 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Figure 6 40 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Write Single B3 0 MSG JE Read Write Message CEN J 1 MSG File MG14 0 CDNO Setup Screen lt CER 5 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 35 MicroLogix 1100 Formatting a Message to Write Single Parameter Figure 6 41 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens i MSG MG14 0 1 Elements Ins Aid Hop Ded Remie Hop To Address Type To Address Mn Net AP Device su 10 31 100 78 MER From Post Channel 1 From Device This MicioLogic Geral MuliHop Send Data Receive Data Control Vits Ignore if timed out TO 0 This Controles Channet Communication Command Send F50 0 Sen 1 Break Connection BK 0 Awaiting Execution Ew p Sie in Bytes Receive NVA trm ror Message done DN 1 Message Trarsniltiny
44. 6 Configuring the Adapter Figure 3 7 Edit IP Addr Cfg 1 HIM Screen Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder The ENET status indicator will be solid green or flashing green if the IP address is correctly configured Setting a Subnet Mask Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 36 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled This parameter must be set to Disabled to configure the subnet mask using the adapter parameters Set the value of Parameters 42 Subnet Cfg 1 through 45 Subnet Cfg 4 to the desired value for the subnet mask Figure 3 8 Edit Subnet Cfg 1 HIM Screen Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg i Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder Setting a Gateway Address for the Adapter Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 36 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled This parameter must be set to Disabled to configure the gateway address using the adapter parameters Set the value of Parameters 46 Gateway Cfg 1 through 49 Gateway Cfg 4 to the IP address of the gateway device PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual
45. 8 9 Future enhancements may result in adapter web pages that look different than the examples shown in this chapter After configuring the adapter you can view its web pages These pages present information about the adapter the drive to which it is connected and the other DPI devices connected to the drive such as a HIM By default the adapter web pages are disabled To enable the adapter web pages set Parameter 52 Web Enable to 1 Enabled and then reset the adapter for the change to take effect The adapter can be configured to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action Bit 0 of Parameter 53 Web Features can be used to protect the configured settings For more details see Configure E mail Notification Web Page on page 8 6 Viewing the Web Pages of the Adapter 1 Onacomputer with access to the EtherNet IP network on which the drive adapter is installed launch a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5 0 or greater The computer can access the adapter web pages if it is connected to the same network as the drive adapter or if it is connected to a network with access to the drive adapter s network via a gateway device for example a router PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 8 2 Viewing the A
46. Allen Bradley 1756 FWFR A 1756 10 100 Mbps Fthernet Rridge w Fnhanced Web Services Allen Bradley 1756 SYNCH A SynchLink Interface Allen Dradley Controllers Digital Drives 3 Motion LL 2 Find Add Favorite By Category By Vendor Favorites Cancel Help In the list select the EtherNet IP bridge used by your controller In this example we use a 1756 ENBT EtherNet IP Bridge Series A so the 1756 ENBT A option is selected Then click OK In the Select Major Revision pop up dialog box select the major revision of its firmware Click OK The bridge s New Module screen Figure 4 5 appears PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 4 Configuring the I O Figure 4 5 New Module Bridge New Module Screen 1756 ENBT A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethemet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley Local My_FtherNet_IP_Rriige Address Host Name f IP Address C Hast Name F3 Open Module Properties Electronic Keying Compatible Keying tma or 5 Editthe following Box Setting Name A name to identify the bridge Description Optional description of the bridge IP Address The IP address of the EtherNet IP bridge Host Name Not used Slot The slot of the EtherNet IP bridge in the rack Revision The minor revision of the firmware in the bridge You already set the major revision by selecting the
47. Applying POWef is a ince ata ues URGE eda wins ebawiaa CAU eek Ea 2 4 Commissioning the Adapter 0 0 0 c cece eee teens 2 6 Configuring the Adapter Configuration Tools llle 3 1 Using the Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM sseeeeeeeee 3 1 Using BOOTP 3t nur erecta Gina bd uera E rete acea cede 3 2 Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 3 5 Setting the Data Rate llleleleeeeeeeee eens 3 7 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer 3 8 Setting a Fault Action eis dena eda a ata ae Ea HE Gees 3 14 Setting Web Access Control 3 16 Resetting the Adapter 2 0 g4 cage eee te etr ege de eg ra acea 3 17 Restoring Adapter Parameters to Factory Defaults 0000 3 17 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters llle 3 18 Flash Updating the Adapter lsseeeeee eee 3 18 Configuring the I O Using RSLinx Classi oes ae alesse eed abe NRA Re RC Ep EE 4 1 ControlLogix Example sseeeeeeeeee neces 4 2 Limitations When Using PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 4 20 PLC 5 Example 13 m wlan acetivateanetao re eder eR ate ete ac ced een 4 21 SLC 500 Example 54 ce ERR RR ex gae ince Ce ic oe s 4 29 MicroLogix 1100 Example seseeeeeeee cece eee 4 37 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P ii Table of Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8
48. BOOTP the BOOTP setting or the adapter parameter settings for the IP address PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 2 4 Installing the Adapter Connecting the Adapter to the Network Applying Power ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before connecting the embedded EtherNet IP adapter to the network 1 Remove power from the drive Remove the drive cover Use static control precautions gt amp t Connect an Ethernet cable to the EtherNet IP network See Figure 2 2 for an example of wiring to an EtherNet IP network Figure 2 2 Connecting the Ethernet Cable to the Network PowerFlex 755 Drives each with embedded Controller EtherNet IP adapter Router ControlLogix shown with optional 1756 ENBT Bridge F G 5 e miel EtherNet IP Switch 5 Route the Ethernet cable through the bottom of the PowerFlex 755 drive and insert the cable s plug into the embedded EtherNet IP adapter s mating socket item 3 in Figure 1 1 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage injury or death A exists Unpredictable operation may occur if you fail to verify that parameter settings are compatible with your application Verify that settings are compatible wit
49. Cmd Ref Custom Peer I O Configuration Peer I O also allows more flexibility in sending custom data over the network but requires more configuration Important Because of the 32 bit REAL floating point Reference the following method works only if the drives transmitting and receiving are PowerFlex 750 Series drives To set up the master broadcast side of custom Peer I O 1 Decide how many Datalink parameters you want to transmit Set Parameter 87 DLs To Peer Cfg to that value Determine how the Datalinks are allocated The highest numbered of the 16 Datalinks are allocated to Peer I O For example if Parameter 87 DLs To Peer Cfg is set to 3 then Datalinks 14 15 and 16 are allocated to Peer I O To avoid an overlap between Master Slave and Peer I O make sure that Parameter 35 DLs To Net Act plus Parameter 87 DLs To Peer Cfg does not total more than 16 Set Parameters 17 through 32 DL To Net 01 16 to the parameters you want to transmit based on the allocation in Step 2 Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder so that changes to Parameter 87 DLs To Peer Cfg take effect PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 3 12 Configuring the Adapter 6 Set Parameters 89 To Peer Period and 90 To Peer Skip as required for your applicati
50. Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Default Values Type Default Values Type Reset Required Default Bit Values Type Reset Required 0 0 0 0 0 255 Read Write Yes 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10Mbps Full 2 10Mbps Half 3 100Mbps Full 4 100Mbps Half Read Write Yes 0 No Link 0 No Link 1 10Mbps Full 2 10Mbps Half 3 100Mbps Full 4 100Mbps Half 5 Dup IP Addr Read Only 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Write Yes XXXX XXXX XX01 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Write No E D e 2 Not Used Not Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Bit 28 Definition 2 2 OJo zz Default x x Bit 15 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P A x F x D 4 No No al x No Ai x No x No Po x No No Parameter No Name and Description 54 55 56 Comm Fit Action Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that I O communications have been disrupted This setting is effective only if I O that controls the drive is transmitted through the adapter A Adapter Parameters Details Default Values Type Reset Required B 5 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4
51. Display Pop up Window The Process Display pop up window dynamically shows the host drive s information To view this window click the Process Display link in the navigation menu Figure 8 2 Example of Process Display Pop up Window T nttp 10 91 100 73 Rockwell Automation Microsoft Internet C B Process Display Product Text Status Commanded Direction Rotation Direction Process Status PowerFlex 755 Stopped Forward Forward 0 000 Hz 0 00000 Amps 523 280 Bus VDC 0 00000 Out Vits 0 00000 Out Pwr 0 256000 Elp kWHr 0 00000 Trq Cur This page refreshes automatically every 3 seconds internet Information Description Product Text Description of host Status Status of host Commanded Direction Commanded direction of host Rotation Direction Rotation direction of host Process Status PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Line 1 Dynamic value of the host drive feedback parameter which is not selectable Lines 2 7 Dynamic values of the default displayed host parameters Each default parameter shown on these lines can be changed by the user via a HIM DriveExecutive or DriveExplorer TCP IP Configuration Web Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8 5 The TCP IP Configuration web page provides information about the adapter s Ethernet settings and network activities Figure 8 3 Example of TCP IP Conf
52. Drive Only host devices can have alarms 1 Most Recent Alarm 2 Second Most Recent Alarm Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision UINT Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Maximum number of alarms that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Alarm Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear Alarm 2 Clear Alarm Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved USINT USINT UINT n 5 Get Number of Recorded Alarms UINT Number of alarms in the queue A 0 indicates the alarm queue is empty PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 22 EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of UINT Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRING 16 Alarm text STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved UINT Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of UINT Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time B
53. EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG10 0 for the message created in Step 2 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 4 24 Configuring the I O General Tab Box This PLC 5 4 Inthe MSG instruction Figure 4 27 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 28 Figure 4 27 PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout MSG Read Write Message CEN 2 Control MG10 0 CDN Setup Screen lt CER MG10 0 MG10 0 CU DN EN MG10 0 ER 5 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen Figure 4 28 PLC 5 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout 5 MSG Rung 2 0 MG10 0 Dd Remove Hop 10 91 100 73 Tha PLCS Communication Command Data Table Address N20 0 Size in Elements Port Number Target Device Data I able Address N42 3 Maen Ignore if timed cat T0 n To be retied NR 0 Awaiting Execution wt D Continuous Run CO 0 Erro ERE v Message done DN n Message Transmitting ST n Message Enabled EN 0 Error Enw CodefHex 0 Error Desenption No emis
54. Eroe Instance hex 217 deck 535 Attribute hex s der s Enor Code hesto Enor Descnphon No eno The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single write message General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 2 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the request file Service Generic Set Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 535 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 or 10 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important When set
55. Fr Peer Enable Controls whether Peer I O input is operating A value of O Off turns off Peer I O input A value of 1 Cmd Ref overrides the settings in Parameters 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg 78 Logic Src Cfg and 79 Ref Src Cfg and automatically uses peer Datalink 01 as the drive s present Logic Command and peer Datalink 02 as the drive s Reference A value of 2 Custom enables peer I O input using the Datalink count and settings provided by the user Fr Peer Status Displays the status of the consumed Peer I O input connection PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Details Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Default Values Type 10 00 Seconds 0 01 Seconds 10 00 Seconds Read Write No DODDO 255 Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Custom Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted Read Only Parameter No Name and Description 87 88 89 90 91 DLs To Peer Cfg Sets the number of drive to network Datalinks parameters that are used for Peer I O The Datalinks being used are allocated from the end of the list For example if this parameter s value is set to 3 Datalinks 14 16 are allocated for the
56. General Tab Box This Controller 4 Inthe MSG instruction Figure 4 35 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 36 Figure 4 35 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout MSG f Read Write Message C EN 0 34 Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write CDN Target Device 500CPU Local Remote Local CER gt Control Block N10 0 Control Block Length 51 Setup Screen N10 0 N10 0 JE CUD 13 15 N10 0 12 5 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen Figure 4 36 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout E MSG Rung 2 0 N10 0 General Muti lop i Del Remove Hon To Address 10 31 100 79 DER From Post Channel 1 To Address Type EtherNet IP Device str E MSG Rung 2 0 N10 0 This Controller Communication Command 500CPU write Dala T able Address Size in Elemerks fi Channel Control Bite Ignore if timed out TO 0 To be retried NR 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Continuous Run CN o Enor ER U Message done DN u Message Transmitting ST 0 Message Enabled IEN 0 Waiting for Queue Space 0 Target Device Message Timeout 5 Dala Table Addess N423 Local Remote MuliHup Fror Enoi CodefHex 0 Setting Communication Command This setting is unavailable gray
57. Loss 82 Port 2 DPI Loss 49 Drive Powerup 49 Drive Powerup 49 Drive Powerup 49 Drive Powerup 49 Drive Powerup 83 Port 3 DPI Loss Net Idle Fit 49 Drive Powerup Drive Powerup 83 Port 3 DPI Loss 49 Drive Powerup 49 Drive Powerup 49 Drive Powerup 83 Port 3 DPI Loss 83 Port 3 DPI Loss Drive Powerup 49 Drive Powerup 83 Port 3 DPI Loss 83 Port 3 DPI Loss Rockwell Automation Value 6 79738E 06 1 16388E 07 2 57547E 06 0 0 200000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Ref A Auto 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 4 00000 Ultimate BW MaxPriSrisBW 100 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 Rockwell Automation Time stamp 2008 11 25 18 12 38 305 2008 11 25 18 16 07 236 2008 11 25 18 13 05 343 2008 11 25 18 13 01 820 2008 11 25 18 12 52 090 2008 11 25 18 10 30 710 2008 11 25 18 10 21 550 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 2008 11 25 23 13 49 203 2008 11 25 18 35 09 533 2008 11 25 21 30 16 010 2008 11 25 21 26 36 160 2008 11 25 21 24 35 611 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 2008 11 25 23 34 23 524 2008 11 25 00 13 05 489 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 2008 11 25 18 30 17 387 2008 11 25 18 00 04 094 LL Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8 11 Figure 8 9 Example of Port 00 PowerFlex 755 Drive Alarm Queue Page Rockwell Automation Adptr Expand Minimize D Process display E J Descriptio TCP IP configurati amy no No Entry D Configure e mail e Ga Browse
58. Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required B 9 0 0 16 Read Write Yes 0 0 16 Read Only 10 00 Seconds 0 01 Seconds 10 00 Seconds Read Write No 1 1 16 Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Custom Read Write No PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P B 10 Adapter Parameters Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C presents information about the EtherNet IP objects that can be accessed using Explicit Messages For information on the format of Explicit Messages and example ladder logic programs refer to Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Class Code Class Code Object Hex Dec Page Object Hex Dec Page Identity Object Ox01 1 C 2 DPI Alarm Object 0x98 152 C 21 Assembly Object 0x04 4 C 3 DPI Diagnostic Object 0x99 153 C 23 Register Object 0x07 7 C 4 DPI Time Object Ox9B 155 C 25 PCCC Object 0x67 103 C 6 Host DPI Parameter Object 0x9F 159 C 28 DPI Device Object 0x92 146 C 10 TCP IP Interface Object OxF5 245 C 34 DPI Parameter Object 0x93 147 C 13 Ethernet Link Object OxF6 246 C 36 DPI Fault Object 0x97 151 C 19 TIP R
59. N20 was used Figure 5 11 shows the entire data file address structure for this example Figure 5 11 Data File Table for Example Ladder Logic Program Data File N20 dec Offset HEI Radix Decimal x Columns 10 v Important The N20 0 data table address in this example is used to set a control timeout value in seconds which determines how long it will take the adapter to detect a communication loss Enter a valid value between 1 32767 for N20 0 A value of zero 0 is not valid since it disables the timeout and all I O messages Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks intended for the drive will not execute Table 5 D shows the I O definitions as they relate to the N20 data table file Figure 5 11 being used in this example For PowerFlex 750 Series drives which contain both DINT 32 bit format and REAL floating point format data types you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits the remaining value will be in the MSW data table address PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using the I O 5 15 Table 5 D PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives relied Description N20 0 Control Timeout N20 1 Logic Status LSW see Appendix D N20 2 Logic Status MSW see Appendix D N20
60. Not an Extended Parameter Reference Reference 1 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be writab
61. Port 14 Drive Logix 11111 Alternate Man Ref Sel X Reserved x Running 0 Not Running 1 Running x Jogging 0 Not Jogging Par 556 amp 557 1 Jogging x Stopping 0 Not Stopping 1 Stopping x DC Brake 0 Not DC Brake 1 DC Brake x DB Active 0 Not Dynamic Brake Active 1 Dynamic Brake Active x Speed Mode 0 Not Speed Mode Par 309 1 Speed Mode x Position Mode 0 Not Position Mode Par 309 1 Position Mode X Torque Mode 0 Not Torque Mode Par 309 1 Torque Mode X At Zero Speed 0 Not at Zero Speed 1 At Zero Speed X At Home 0 Not at Home 1 At Home x At Limit 0 Not at Limit 1 At Limit X Current Limit 0 Not at Current Limit 1 At Current Limit x Bus Freq Reg 0 Not Bus Freq Reg 1 Bus Freq Reg X Enable On 0 Not Enable On 1 Enable On x Motor Overload 0 Not Motor Overload 1 Motor Overload X Regen 0 Not Regen 1 Regen PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Glossary Adapter Devices such as drives controllers and computers usually require an adapter to provide a communication interface between them and a network such as EtherNet IP An adapter reads data on the network and transmits it to the connected device It also reads data in t
62. Send Fit Cfg Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 54 Comm FIt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I O communications are disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Idle Fit Action Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that the controller is in program mode or faulted This setting is effective only if I O that controls the drive is transmitted through the adapter ras Default Values Type Reset Required 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 55 Idle Flt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive when the controller is idle By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system respon
63. Speed 7 55 5 Hz Figure 6 47 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Write Multiple B3 0 MSG m J H Read Write Message EN 3 MSG File MG18 0 DN Setup Screen lt ER PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 40 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Figure 6 48 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens i MSG MG18 0 1 Elements General MuliHup Send Data Receive Data Inv Add Hop Del Remove Hop Tu Ackhess 1051 10 73 Fiom Device Finn Pot To Addess Type Channel 1 theiNe P Device st i MSG MG18 0 1 Elements This Controles Channet Communication Command Dala Table Arles Receive 90 0 Serf 90 0 Sim in Bytes Receive 19 Sea 40 Control Wits Ignore if timed out T0 0 Break Connection BK 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 tno LH n Message done IDN 1 Message Trarrsmilling 5T 0 Message Frablesd FN n Tract Device Message Timeout 33 Local Remote Local Mutton yee Exdernder Roding Info File REX R210 s Serves Faas Service Code het Eno CodefHex 0 Class hesi dec Instance thes n dect f Ambue he y Erce Description No emos The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a multiple
64. Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Get Attribute Single This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code e Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 7 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 9 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Source Element Leave blank not applicable Source Length 0 bytes Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Output Current 9 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My PowerFlex 755 Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When selecting a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder for this example My_PowerFlex_755_Drive 9 n this example Output Current is a 32 bit floating point parameter so the Data Type field must be set to REAL
65. an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10 Decima Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 10 Decima Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Object Specific Services Implemented for Allocation Size in bytes Service Code Class Instance Service Name Par Number Par Value 0x4D Yes No Get Attributes Scattered 4 4 Ox4E Yes No Set Attributes Scattered 4 4
66. and Xerox Corporation Windows Microsoft and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Summary of Changes This is the first release of the PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P soc ii Summary of Changes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Table of Contents About This Manual Related Documentation o eene 0006 cece eee e een eas P 1 Rockwell Automation Support ssseeeseeeeee P 2 Conventions Used in This Manual 0 cee eee ae P 2 Getting Started Components oc ove Reden b pe Oboe X ANC ROCA HS dta dud 1 1 PO atUres ssh cscs sat idk ee de eda ds Seeger ees Se Ea eee es Eka eas 1 2 Compatible Products 4 esc ces ede e ere Ru me RE Ep ER 1 3 Required Equipment 0 0 eee eee eee eee ee 1 3 Safety Precautions gt iex Repub dee eges de isa eben beaes 1 4 Sing docu mc 1 5 Status Indicators ooa ecaa ueia e aiae DEE y E a nent han 1 6 Installing the Adapter Preparing for an Installation 0 0 0 ene nes 2 1 Setting the IP Address Switches 0 0 0 eee eee nes 2 2 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 0 0 0 0c eee eee 2 4
67. appear in the destination tag named Scattered Write Response Figure 6 13 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 13 Example Scattered Write Response Data Scattered Write Response Scallered Wille Response 0 536 DINT Scattered Write Response 1 z DINT Scattered Write Responce 2 s32 DINT Scalleed Wille Rerponse 3 DINT Scattered Wite Flesponzel4 575 DINT Scattered Wiite_Response 5 DINT Scattered Write Responcel6 576 DINT Scattered Wie Responze 7 DINT Scatteted Wiite Response 8 77 DINT Scattered Write Responce 3 DINT PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 13 ControlLogix Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 6 14 use 32 bit words and can accommodate up to 32 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with Bit 15 set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code Figure 6 14 Data Structures for Scattered Read Write Messages Request Source Data DINT 0 Parameter Number Response Destination Data DINT 0 Parameter Number 1 Pad 1 Parameter Value 2 Parameter Number 2 Parameter Number 3 Pad 3 Parameter Value 4 Parameter Number 4 Parameter Number 5 Pad 5 Parameter Value 6 Pa
68. be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class 1 Host 2 15 Peripherals on Ports 1 14 Class Attributes Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 2 UINT Total number of instances Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Vendor ID UINT 1 Allen Bradley 2 Get Device Type UINT 123 3 Get Product Code UINT Number identifying product name and rating 4 Get Revision STRUCT of Major USINT Value varies Minor USINT Value varies 5 Get Status UINT Bit 0 Owned Bit 8 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 Major recoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique 32 bit number 7 Get Product Name SHORT STRING Product name and rating PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Assembly Object EtherNet IP Objects C 3 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x04 4 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All VO data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All I O data written to the DPI device read write Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Revision UINT 2 2 Get Max Instance UINT 2 100 Set Control Timeout UINT Control timeout in seconds Instance Attribute
69. devices No Entry arot 0 PowerFl No Entry Module inform D Diagnostics No Enty Fault queue No Entry Alarm queue No Entry i Port 1 Not Ava No Entry Gi Port 2 1203 US Ca Port 3 20 HIM No Entry Gi Port 4 DeviceN No Entry E Pot i bd ae No Entry Ca Port 7 Not Ava No Entry Gi Port 8 Not Ava No Entry No Entry No Entry No Entry No Entry o OG Avawhe EX Or RA RR amp NQUBWNeK OS Gi Port 9 Not Ava Gi Port 10 Not Av Ca Port 11 Not Av Gi Port 12 Not Av E Onirs senna No Entry Software tools We No Entry Launch my DriveE 0 No Entry W Launch my Drive No Entry Ca Port 13 EtherN Ca Port 14 Device 23 E mail technical s No Entry gt No Entry Figure 8 10 shows an example event queue page for the Port 13 device embedded EtherNet IP adapter Figure 8 10 Example of Port 13 Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter Event Queue Page ID HTTP 404 Not Found Microsoft Internet Explorer Rockwell Automation Expand Minimize 3 Process display De scription Time stamp TCP IP configurati Net 10 Timeout 2008 11 25 00 35 10 356 D Configure e mail n Gu Browse devices Net IO Open 2008 11 25 18 13 21 222 Net 10 Timeout 2008 11 25 18 13 19 552 Net IO Open 2008 11 25 18 13 09 310 Net Link Up 2008 11 25 18 13 06 106 Device Power Up 2008 11 25 18 13 01 820 App Updated 2008 11 25 18 13 01 820 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00
70. gateway device on the adapter s network Primary DNS The address of the primary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices Secondary DNS Optional the address of the secondary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices when the primary DNS server is unavailable Domain Name The text name corresponding to the numeric IP address that was assigned to the server that controls the network 1 For definitions of these terms refer to the Glossary 5 Click OK to apply the settings Devices on the network issuing BOOTP requests appear in the BOOTP Request History list PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 3 4 Configuring the Adapter 6 gt In the BOOTP Request History list either double click the adapter s Ethernet Address MAC noted in Step 1A or Step 1B or click New in the Relation List The New Entry dialog box Figure 3 4 appears In the first case the Ethernet Address MAC is automatically entered In the latter case you must manually enter it Figure 3 4 New Entry Dialog Box New Entry Fihesried Addess MAC 100 00 BC 08 60 09 IP Address 10 91 100 79 Hostname EmbdENet 214 Oeectiption Bldg 6 Floor 2 Fan IA UK Cancel Edit the following Box Type IP Address 7 A unique IP address for the adapter Host Name Optional Description
71. in one explicit message For explicit messaging using the PCCC N File method the N150 N Files must be used because they are already mapped to specific parameters in the drive and its connected peripherals This enables direct access to any parameter For PCCC N150 N File information refer to page C 9 The CIP messaging method provides a Generic Get Set Attribute Service which can be used to perform single parameter read or write and multiple parameter read or write explicit messages Also the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive s Non Volatile Storage NVS or the drive s Random Access Memory RAM Note that when selecting the data to be written to RAM the data will be lost if the drive loses power For supported classes instances and attributes refer to Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects MicroLogix 1100 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 007 Output Current in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Figure 6 37 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Read Single B3 0 MSG F Read Write Message CEN gt 0 MSG File MG13 0 CDN 5 Setup Screen CER 5 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Expli
72. manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss WARNING Identifies information about practices or Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures t Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment Allen Bradley PowerFlex ControlFLASH DPI DriveExplorer DriveExecutive DriveTools SP RSLogix ControlLogix PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc EtherNet IP is a trademark of ODVA and ControlNet International Ltd Ethernet is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel Corporation
73. match This requires loading the project I O settings into the drive 1 In the treeview under I O Configuration right click on the drive profile for this example My_PowerFlex_755_Drive and select Properties Click the Drive tab and then click Connect to Drive Figure 4 16 to begin the correlation process PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 14 Configuring the I O Figure 4 16 Drive Correlation Screen Wil Module Properties My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge PowerFlex 755 EENET 1 5 General Connection Module info Pot Configuration Dive elsa epe Bl onenercomaaes Eres Correlation with online dave hae not been completed No dnve data can be displayed until correlation has completed Click the Connect lo Drive button to begin comelation Status Fauted After the drive configuration data has been verified a pop up dialog box will appear to synchronize ports from the online drive to the project to ensure that the correct Datalinks are assigned Click OK If the Differences Found screen Figure 4 17 appears which is typical click Download This will download the project settings from the controller to the drive and its connected adapter If Upload is clicked the drive and adapter settings are uploaded to the controller Figure 4 17 Differences Found Screen Differences Found Differences were found between the project and the drive How do you want t
74. may take a minute to complete Thereafter the I O OK box in the upper left of the RSLogix 5000 window should now be solid green and the yellow warning symbols in the treeview under the I O Configuration folder and drive profile should be gone 4 Click OK to close the Module Properties screen for the drive Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile all versions The basic RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile is only recommended when e A specific drive profile in other versions of RSLogix 5000 is unavailable e Users are already familiar with a Generic Profile and do not want to convert an existing project to an Add On Drive Profile v16 or higher e A project must maintain specific revision level control e Version 16 Only The controller cannot be taken offline Version 16 enables the Generic Profile to be added while the controller is online and in the Run mode Adding the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge 1 In the treeview right click on the bridge and select New Module to display the Select Module screen Figure 4 19 In our example we right click on the 1756 ENBT A bridge Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules Figure 4 19 Select Module Screen E Select Module Description 176913 Ethernet Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on CompactLogixS335C 1788 CN2D
75. network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Data Table Address 9 N45 0 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop MultiHop Tab Box To Address Yes Enables communication to allow Ethernet messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen Setting 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For N File details see N Files on page C 8 TIP If the controller is controlling more than one drive it is recommended to intersperse the control I O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time That is sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P SLC 500 Example Configuring the I O 4 29 Example Network After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figur
76. object C 23 DPI Fault object C 19 DPI Parameter object C 13 DPI Time object C 25 DriveExecutive software adapter configuration tool 3 1 definition web site G 2 DriveExplorer software adapter configuration tool 3 1 definition web site G 2 free lite version G 2 drives see PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class drives DriveTools SP software G 2 duplex communication mode definition G 2 selecting 3 7 E EDS Electronic Data Sheet files definition web site G 2 EEPROM see Non Volatile Storage NVS ENET status indicator locating 1 6 troubleshooting with 7 2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Index 2 equipment required 1 3 Ethernet cable 2 4 connector on adapter 1 1 switch 2 4 Ethernet Link object C 36 EtherNet IP data rates A 1 example network for ControlLogix 4 2 MicroLogix 1100 4 37 PLC 5 4 21 SLC 500 4 29 network definition G 2 objects C 1 specification G 2 events clearing viewing 7 5 list of 7 5 explicit messaging about 6 1 configuring for ControlLogix 6 3 MicroLogix 1100 6 32 PLC 5 6 14 SLC 500 6 18 definition G 3 performing 6 2 F fault action configuring the adapter for 3 14 definition G 3 fault configuration configuring the adapter for 3 15 definition G 3 faults see events features 1 2 firmware release P 2 flash update definition G 3 guidelines 3 18 Fit Cfg DL 01 16 parameters B 7
77. on your computer Any Datalinks that were enabled in the controller and adapter during I O configuration must also be configured in the drive Each Datalink being used must be assigned to a specific parameter in the drive or connected peripheral see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy on page 3 8 or Custom Peer I O Configuration on page 3 11 If this is not done the controller will receive or send placeholder data instead of actual drive or peripheral parameter values Place the controller in Remote Run or Run Mode PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 4 20 Configuring the I O Limitations When Using PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Controlling I O with explicit messages is relatively complex compared to normal implicit I O control ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers with EtherNet IP provide the easiest and most integrated form of implicit I O control for a PowerFlex drive RSLogix 5000 v16 and higher programming software for ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers contains integrated profiles for PowerFlex drives that with a few clicks of the mouse automatically create all controller tags and an implicit connection at the specified Requested Packet Interval to control the drive This connection is monitored at both ends to ensure that the controller and drive are communicating A watchdog will cause a drive fault if the drive does not respond within approxim
78. packets That is all multicast packets are re transmitted to all ports IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports associated with a particular IP multicast group Switches that support IGMP snooping learn which ports have devices that are part of a particular multicast group and only forward the multicast packets to the ports that are part of the multicast group Be careful as to what level of support a switch has of IGMP snooping Some layer 2 switches that support IGMP snooping require a router which could be a layer 3 switch to send out IGMP polls to learn what devices are part of the multicast group Some layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping without a router sending polls If your control system is a stand alone network or is required to continue performing if the router is out of service make sure the switch you are using supports IGMP snooping without a router being present Verify that you have all required equipment Refer to Required Equipment on page 1 3 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 2 2 Installing the Adapter Setting the IP Address Switches There are three methods for configuring the embedded EtherNet IP adapter s IP address e Adapter Rotary Switches Use the switches when working on a simple isolated network for exampl
79. protect the settings PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 8 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Figure 8 5 shows an example e mail message automatically sent by the adapter in response to selected events Figure 8 5 Example of E mail Message Sent by Adapter PowerFlex755 10 91 100 79 To jdoe e example com ec 11 05 2008 01 55 PM i bcc Subject Notice from example drive Seq 2 Drive at 10 91 100 79 reported fault 82 Port 2 DPI Loss is an automated message f lex 755 Eth 100 79 Please do not rep is message TIP To stop e mail messages uncheck all of the Send an e mail message when boxes Disabling the adapter web pages by setting Parameter 52 Web Enable to 0 Disabled will NOT stop the adapter from sending e mail messages PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P DPI Device Information Pages Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8 9 DPI device information pages consist of these five pages Module information page Diagnostic items page Fault queue page Alarm queue page Event queue page Figure 8 6 shows an example module information page for the Port 00 device host drive Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 and Figure 8 9 respectively show example diagnostic items fault queue and alarm queue pages for this device Figure 8 10 shows an example event q
80. running various Microsoft Windows operating systems DriveExplorer version 6 xx or higher can be used to configure this adapter and PowerFlex drive Information about DriveExplorer software and a free lite version can be accessed at http www ab com drives driveexplorer DriveTools SP Software A software suite designed for running on various Microsoft Windows operating systems This software suite provides a family of tools including DriveExecutive that you can use to program monitor control troubleshoot and maintain Allen Bradley products DriveTools SP can be used with PowerFlex drives Information about DriveTools SP can be accessed at http www ab com drives drivetools Duplex Duplex describes the mode of communication Full duplex communications let a device exchange data in both directions at the same time Half duplex communications let a device exchange data only in one direction at a time The duplex used by the adapter depends on the type of duplex that other network devices such as switches support EDS Electronic Data Sheet Files Simple text files that are used by network configuration tools to describe products so that you can easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a product device type and revision EDS files for many Allen Bradley products can be found at http www ab com networks eds EtherNet IP Network EtherNet IP Industrial Protocol is an open producer consumer communication
81. significant N45 23 DL From Net 10 most significant DL To Net 10 most significant N45 24 DL From Net 11 least significant DL To Net 11 least significant N45 25 DL From Net 11 most significant DL To Net 11 most significant N45 26 DL From Net 12 least significant DL To Net 12 least significant N45 27 DL From Net 12 most significant DL To Net 12 most significant N45 28 DL From Net 13 least significant DL To Net 13 least significant N45 29 DL From Net 13 most significant DL To Net 13 most significant N45 30 DL From Net 14 least significant DL To Net 14 least significant N45 31 DL From Net 14 most significant DL To Net 14 most significant N45 32 DL From Net 15 least significant DL To Net 15 least significant N45 33 DL From Net 15 most significant DL To Net 15 most significant N45 34 DL From Net 16 least significant DL To Net 16 least significant N45 35 DL From Net 16 most significant DL To Net 16 most significant PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 9 N File N150 N199 Description These N files let you read and write parameter values in the PowerFlex 755 drive as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For example to read parameter 1 read two elem
82. store the request value 10 1 sec that was written to drive parameter 535 Accel Time 1 Figure 6 42 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data File Data File 50 elk it 1 2 4 TIP To verify that the parameter value was successfully written use the HIM DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive to access the parameter and view its newly written value MicroLogix 1100 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive 001 Output Frequency 007 Output Current 008 Output Voltage 009 Output Power and 011 DC Bus Volts Figure 6 43 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Read Multiple MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG17 0 C A J Setup Screen lt ER 3 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 37 MicroLogix 1100 Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Figure 6 44 Custom Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens i MSG MG17 0 1 Elements Ded Remove Hop 10 91 100 79 Els Ne AP Device fn Channel 1 i MSG MG17 0 1 Elements Geral MutiHop Send Data Receive Data This Controller Control Dits Channet lors Kired oe TOF
83. the number of drives that can be connected In summary unlike a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller programming a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controller using RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software with explicit messages is a lot more difficult and produces a far more complex program PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P PLC 5 Example Configuring the I O 4 21 Important The PLC 5 must be Series E Rev D 1 or higher to support the MultiHop feature that routes messaging to the drive Example Network After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 4 25 In our example we will configure a PLC 5 40E controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 32 Datalinks 16 to read 16 to write over the network Figure 4 25 PLC 5 Example EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 PLC 5 40E Controller with Embedded Ethernet E g IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 755 Drive with Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter Computer with Ethernet Connection Configuring Parameters for Network I O Since the I O for the drive is message b
84. to 9 be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to 10 will write the parameter value to temporary memory so the parameter value will be lost after the drive is power cycled It is recommended to use the 10 setting when frequent write messages are required 9 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter If the parameter being written to is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Words would be set to 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 22 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this example we use the data table address in Figure 6 26 to store the request value 10 1 sec that was written to drive parameter 535 Accel Time 1 Figure 6 26 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data File Z Data File 103 DAR 2 4 TIP To verify that the parameter value was successfully written use the HIM DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive to access the parameter and view its newly written value SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive 001 Output Frequency 007 Output Current
85. to set these attributes using the adapter parameters instead you must first disable BOOTP and then set these network address parameters in the adapter Accessing Parameters in the Adapter 1 2 Display the Status screen which is shown on HIM power up Use the WE or BED key to scroll to Port 13 which is the port always dedicated to the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Press the PAR soft key to display the Jump to Param entry pop up box Use the numeric keys to enter the desired parameter number or use the A or V soft key to scroll to the desired parameter number Disabling the BOOTP Feature 1 2 Set the value of Parameter 36 BOOTP to 0 Disabled Figure 3 6 Edit BOOTP HIM Screen Value Setting 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder After disabling the BOOTP feature you can then configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address using adapter parameters Setting an IP Address Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 36 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled This parameter must be set to Disabled to configure the IP address using the adapter parameters Set the value of Parameters 38 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 41 IP Addr Cfg 4 to a unique IP address PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 3
86. unused routing information file for the controller Setting 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 41 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For details on setting the control timeout value and its function see N Files on page C 8 Creating MicroLogix 1100 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datalinks 1 4 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG11 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG11 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG11 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instructi
87. web logo at far right Home Page PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8 3 Navigation Menu on Adapter Web Pages The navigation menu appears on the left side of all adapter web pages including its Home page The navigation menu consists of links and link folders which can be expanded or minimized The following table shows all navigation menu links and link folders Link Folder Home link Description Click this link to view the adapter s Home Page Figure 8 1 Process Display link Click this link to view the Host s Process Display pop up window Figure 8 2 TCP IP configuration link Click this link to view the adapter s TCP IP Configuration web page showing information about the TCP IP configuration such as the adapter s IP address and the number of packets being sent Figure 8 3 shows an example TCP IP Configuration web page Configure e mail notification link Click this link to view the adapter s Configure E mail Notification web page Figure 8 4 to configure the adapter to send automatic e mail messages An example e mail message is shown in Figure 8 5 Browse DPI devices folder Click this folder to expand and view the Port folders for all present DPI devices including the drive adapter and other DPI devices connected to the drive such as a HIM Port x folders Click a respective Po
88. when creating the controller tag To read a 32 bit DINT parameter set the tag Data Type field to DINT For a 16 bit parameter set the Data Type field to INT Refer to the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 5 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Single Parameter A Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 535 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Table 6 B Example Controller Tags for Write Single Parameter Messaging Program Operand Controller Tags for Write Single Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Write_Message BOOL MSG Single_Write_Message MESSAGE Figure 6 4 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Write Single Execute Single Wnte Message 4S Message EN Message Control Single Wnte Message DN2 ERD PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Write Single Parameter Figure 6 5 Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Write Message Configuration Communication Tac Message Type c P Generic Service fiet Altrhute Si
89. words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which EtherNet IP network is connected Data Table Address N150 14 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive refer to page C 9 MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow EtherNet messaging to be routed to the drive MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive PLC 5 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this example we use the data table address in Figure 6 17 to store the response value 2 401775 amps that was read from drive parameter 007 Output Current Figure 6 17 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File c3 File 102 0 2 401775 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 16 Using Explicit Messaging PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Single Parameter A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 535 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Figure 6 18 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Write Single COP Copy File Source F103 0 Dest N50 2 Length 2 COP Copy File I 3 Source NS0 2 Dest N50 1 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N50 3 Dest N50 0 Length 1 petal Si
90. write message General Tab Example Value Channel 1 Comm Command CIP Generic Data Table Address Receive N80 0 Send N90 0 Size in Bytes Receive 40 2 Send 40 9 Extended Routing RIX21 0 Service Custom Service Code 4E Hex 9 Class 93 Hex Instance 0 Dec Attribute 0 Dec MultiHop Tab Example Value To Address 10 91 100 79 Description Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the response file This address is the starting word of the request file Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Number of bytes to be received Number of bytes to be sent An unused routing information file for the controller Required for scattered messages Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Required for scattered messages Required for scattered messages Description IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable 0 n this example we are writing to five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each paramete
91. 0 eect eens 8 5 Configure E mail Notification Web Page 0 cee eee eee eee 8 6 DPI Device Information Pages 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 8 9 Specifications COMMUNICANONS oppor vrbe Pda YE bey Va p e dee Ra eee A 1 Regulatory Compliance 0 0 2 eect tenes A 1 Adapter Parameters About Parameter Numbers 000 00 cee eee cece ss B 1 How Parameters Are Organized 0 0 eee eee eens B 1 Parameter Last ce Enc x redes PN ME MuR X cea XX eve A o eee s B 2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Appendix C Appendix D Glossary Index Table of Contents iii EtherNet IP Objects Identity Object 2 dicerem eR mee dede p pe she p C 2 Assembly ODJect 33135 qa Gag eee ad era ec ura vi adi a d astra Feb cR C 3 Register Object isses ee egere e e ter Ee de e drca C 4 PCCC Object ouo Cina pia Wiens Paese docks depo ie decia dee hen C 6 DPI Device Object occa scat bene eee ee bed eee Dee ea ERR Rer ere bur C 10 DPI Parameter Object lessen C 13 DPI Fault Object cce ete Sa REED ERES Ey ey e ee C 19 DPI Alarm Object cu oer o Seg sete ERAT sada eens C 21 DPI Diagnostic Object lesse C 23 DPI Time Object oboedire erp re mace t P c v veda eos C 25 Host DPI Parameter Object C 28 TCP IP Interface Object acta esr tee mee ge me Rene ee Rie e C 34 Ethernet Link Object llle C 36 Logic Command Status Word
92. 0 MSW 23 DL To Net 10 MSW 24 DL From Net 11 LSW 24 DL To Net 11 LSW 25 DL From Net 11 MSW 25 DL To Net 11 MSW 26 DL From Net 12 LSW 26 DL To Net 12 LSW 27 DL From Net 12 MSW 27 DL To Net 12 MSW 28 DL From Net 13 LSW 28 DL To Net 13 LSW 29 DL From Net 13 MSW 29 DL To Net 13 MSW 30 DL From Net 14 LSW 30 DL To Net 14 LSW 31 DL From Net 14 MSW 31 DL To Net 14 MSW 32 DL From Net 15 LSW 32 DL To Net 15 LSW 33 DL From Net 15 MSW 33 DL To Net 15 MSW 34 DL From Net 16 LSW 34 DL To Net 16 LSW 35 DL From Net 16 MSW 35 DL To Net 16 MSW PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 5 4 Using the I O Using Logic Command Status Using Reference Feedback The Logic Command is a 32 bit word of control data produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Logic Status is a 32 bit word of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller When using a ControlLogix controller the Logic Command word is always DINT 0 in the output image and the Logic Status word is always DINT 0 in the input image when using the Add On Profile or DINT 1 when using the Generic Profile For a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controller the Logic Command word is always words 0 least significant word and 1 most significant word in the output image and the Logic Status word is always words 0 least significant word and 1 most significa
93. 00 RSLogix 5000 Getting Results Guide 9399 RLD300GR And online help installed with the software ControlLogix and EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User ENET UM001 1756 ENBT or 1756 EN2T Manual PLC 59 Enhanced and Ethernet PLC 5 Programmable 1785 UM012 Controllers User Manual SLC 500 and 1747 L5 xxx SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style User Manual 1747 UM011 MicroLogix 1100 MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual You can view or download publications at www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative 1763 UM001 To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative visit www rockwellautomation com locations For information such as firmware updates or answers to drive related questions go to the Drives Service amp Support web site at www ab com support abdrives and click on the Downloads or Knowledgebase link PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P P 2 About This Manual Rockwell Automation Support Conventions Used in This Manual Rockwell Automation Inc offers support services worldwide with over 75 sales support offices over 500 authorized distributors and over 250 authorized systems integrators located through the United States alone In addition
94. 00 total I O packets per second 200 in and 200 out Drive Protocol Embedded UL UL508C cUL CAN CSA C22 2 No 14 M91 CE EN50178 and EN61800 3 CTick EN61800 3 NOTE This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800 3 In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P A 2 Specifications Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P About Parameter Numbers How Parameters Are Organized Appendix B Adapter Parameters Appendix B provides information about the adapter parameters Topic Page About Parameter Numbers B 1 How Parameters Are Organized B 1 Parameter List B 2 The parameters in the adapter are numbered consecutively However depending on which configuration tool you use they may have different numbers Configuration Tool e HIM e DriveExplorer e DriveExecutive e Explicit Messaging Numbering Scheme The adapter parameters begin with parameter 01 For example Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 is parameter 01 as indicated by this manual Refer to Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging and Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects for details The embedded EtherNet IP adapter parameters are displayed in a Numbered List view order Power
95. 000 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 ree rog No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 D Event queue 1 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 Ca Port 14 Devicel No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 Online user manu No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 Defar oo We No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 I8 Launch my DriveE No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 E mail technical s No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 No Entry 2008 11 25 18 00 00 000 mem p 3 3 one o Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port az az az a a a a a a a az az 12 Not Av a PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 8 12 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Communications Regulatory Compliance Appendix A Specifications Appendix A presents the specifications for the adapter Topic Communications Page A 1 Regulatory Compliance A 1 Network Protocol Data Rates Connection Limits Requested Packet EtherNet IP 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex or 100Mbps Half Duplex 30 TCP connections 16 simultaneous CIP connections including 1 exclusive owner I O connection Interval RPI 2 ms minimum Packet Rate Up to 4
96. 008 Output Voltage 009 Output Power and 011 DC Bus Volts Figure 6 27 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Read Multiple B3 0 EEM f EtherNet IP Explicit Message CEN 2 Control Block N15 0 CDND Control Block Length 58 CER 5 Setup Screen COP Copy File I Source N60 2 Dest N80 1 Length 1 COP Copy File Source EN60 3 Dest N80 0 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N80 0 Dest F104 0 Length 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P COP Using Explicit Messaging Copy File Source Dest Length N60 6 N80 3 1 COP Copy File Source Dest Length N60 7 N80 2 1 COP Copy File Source Dest Length COP Copy File Source Dest Length COP Copy File Source Dest Length COP Copy File Source Dest Length N80 2 8F104 1 1 N60 10 N80 5 1 COP Copy File Source N60 14 Dest N80 7 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N60 15 Dest 8N80 6 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N80 6 Dest 8F104 5 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N60 18 Dest N80 9 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N60 19 Dest N80 8 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N80 8 Dest 8F104 4 Length 1 6 23 For each parameter being read three COP Copy instructions are required to convert the 16 bit integer data table addresses for example
97. 01 DL From Net 01 would be 10000 5 3 50003 1 Set the values of only the required number of contiguous Datalink parameters needed to write data to the drive and that are to be included in the network I O connection 2 Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder 3 Since the Logic Command and Reference are always used in the adapter configure the parameters in the drive to accept the Logic Command and Reference from the adapter If the controller is going to be used for speed reference via the adapter set Parameter 545 Speed Ref A Sel in a PowerFlex 755 drive to Port 13 Reference the drive port dedicated to the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Also verify that the mask parameters in the drive for example Parameter 324 Logic Mask are configured to receive the desired logic from the adapter Refer to the documentation for your drive for details The adapter is ready to receive input data from the master controller You must now configure the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter Refer to Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Enabling Datalinks To Read Data The controller input image drive to controller inputs can have anywhere from 0 to 16 additional 32 bit parameters Datalinks They are configured using Parameters 17 DL To Net 01 through 32 DL To Net 16 The number of Datalinks actively used
98. 1 the Input and Output Size settings must be increased accordingly Input Size Start with 3 words and add 1 word for each Datalink used to write data For example if 3 Datalinks DL From Net xx parameters will be used to write to drive or peripheral PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 17 parameters add 3 words to the required 3 words for a total of 6 words Output Size Start with 2 words and add 1 word for each Datalink used to read data For example if 7 Datalinks DL To Net xx parameters will be used to read drive or peripheral parameters add 7 words to the required 2 words for a total of 9 words For the example in this manual all 16 DL From Net xx and all 16 DL To Net xx are used resulting in an Input Size of 19 and an Output Size of 18 After setting the information in the drive s New Module screen click OK The Module Properties screen appears Click the Connection tab Figure 4 21 Figure 4 21 Connection Screen lll Module Properties My EtherNet IP Dridge ETIIERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI 1002 ms 1 0 3200 0 ms Inhibk Module Maior Fauk On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode T Module Faut Status Offline In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 2 0 milliseconds or gre
99. 11 DL Fr Net 01 Va 12 DL Fr Net 02 Va 13 DL Fr Net 03 Va 14 DL Fr Net 04 Va 15 DL Fr Net 05 Va 16 DL Fr Net 06 Va 17 DL Fr Net 07 Va 18 DL Fr Net 08 Va 19 DL Fr Net 09 Va 20 DL Fr Net 10 Va 21 DL Fr Net 11 Va 22 DL Fr Net 12 Va 23 DL Fr Net 13 Va 24 DL Fr Net 14 Va 25 DL Fr Net 15 Va 26 DL Fr Net 16 Va The present value of respective DL From Net xx parameter being transmitted to the drive by this adapter If not using a Datalink its respective value should be zero 27 DL To Net 01 Val 28 DL To Net 02 Val 29 DL To Net 03 Val 30 DL To Net 04 Val 31 DL To Net 05 Val 32 DL To Net 06 Val 33 DL To Net 07 Val 34 DL To Net 08 Val 35 DL To Net 09 Val 36 DL To Net 10 Val 37 DL To Net 11 Val 38 DL To Net 12 Val 39 DL To Net 13 Val 40 DL To Net 14 Val 41 DL To Net 15 Val 42 DL To Net 16 Val The present value of respective DL To Net xx parameter being received from the drive by this adapter If not using a Datalink its respective value should be zero PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 7 4 Troubleshooting Table 7 A Adapter Diagnostic Items Continued No Name Description 4
100. 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port4 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 Port5 0x5800 OxSBFF 22528 23551 Port6 0x5C00 Ox5FFF 23552 24575 Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port9 0x6800 Ox6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 Ox6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 Ox73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 Ox77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF Name Number of Instances 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Data Type UINT Description Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password UINT 0 Password disabled n Password value 2 Set NVS Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 4 Partial defaults 5 System defaults Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum UINT Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS Get NVS Link Value Checksum UINT Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS Get First Accessible Parameter UINT First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected Get Class Revision UINT 2 DPI Get First Parameter Pr
101. 3 HW Addr 1 Decimal value of each byte in the adapter s Ethernet hardware address yog sep 575 275205 250 280 285 46 IHW Addr 4 47 HW Addr 5 HW Addr 1 48 HW Addr 6 HW Adar 2 HW Addr 3 HW Addr 4 HW Addr 5 HW Addr 6 49 IP Addr Act 1 Value of each byte in the adapter s current IP address A value of 0 appears if the adapter does 50 IP Addr Act 2 not currently have an IP address 1 IP Addr Act s IP Adar Ad A T 255 255 255 IP Addr Act 1 IP Addr Act 2 IP Addr Act 3 IP Addr Act 4 53 Subnet Act 1 Value of each byte in the adapter s current subnet mask A value of 0 appears if the adapter does 54 Subnet Act 2 not currently have a subnet mask 55 Subnet Act 3 56 Subnet Act 4 sm 255 255 255 Subnet Act 1 Subnet Act 2 Subnet Act 3 Subnet Act 4 57 Gateway Act 1 Value of each byte in the adapter s current gateway address A value of 0 appears if the adapter 58 Gateway Act 2 does not currently have a gateway address 59 Gateway Act 3 60 Gateway Act 4 i 255 255 255 Gateway Act 1 Gateway Act 2 Gateway Act 3 Gateway Act 4 61 Net Rx Overruns Number of receive buffer overruns reported by the Ethernet hardware 62 Net Rx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the adapter has received 63 Net Rx Errors Number of receive errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 64 Net Tx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the adapter has sent 65 Net Tx Errors Number of transmit errors reporte
102. 32 19455 Port 2 3 Timer 2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 Port 3 g 0x5000 Ox53FF 20480 21503 Port 4 0x5400 Ox57FF 21504 22527 Port 5 0x5800 Ox5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 0x5C00 OxbFFF 23552 24575 Port 7 0x6000 Ox63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 Ox67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 Ox6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 Ox6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 Ox73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 Ox77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 OX7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type X Description 1 Get Class Revision UINT Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Number of timers in the object excluding the real time clock that is predefined 3 Get First Device Specific Timer UINT Instance of the first timer that is not predefined 4 Set Time Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear all timers Does not clear the real time clock or read only timers 5 Get Number of Supported Time Zones UINT Number of time zones described in the Time Zone List attribute 6 Get Time Zone List STRUCT Identifies a time zone PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 26 EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 7 Get Set Active Time Zone ID UINT The ID field of the Time Zone
103. 32 bit word in a ControlLogix controller or two 16 bit words in a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controller The following rules apply when using PowerFlex 750 Series drive Datalinks e The target of a Datalink can be any Host parameter including those of a peripheral For example drive parameter 535 Accel Time 1 can be assigned to the embedded adapter and any or all of the Option Cards installed in the drive e The data passed through the drive s Datalink mechanism is determined by the settings of adapter Parameters 01 16 DL From Net 01 16 and Parameters 17 32 DL To Net 01 16 e When a Datalink I O connection is active that Datalink is locked and cannot be changed until that I O connection becomes idle or inactive e When you use a Datalink to change a value the value is NOT written to the Non Volatile Storage NVS The value is stored in volatile memory and lost when the drive loses power Thus use Datalinks when you need to change a value of a parameter frequently Datalinks for PowerFlex 750 Series peripherals embedded EtherNet IP adapter and option modules such as an encoder or a communication module are locked when the peripheral has an I O connection with a controller When a controller has an I O connection to the drive the drive does not allow a reset to defaults configuration download or anything else that could change the makeup of the I O connection in a running system The I O connection with the cont
104. 39 message has to be executed first before the Logic Command Reference and DL to Net Datalink messages will work For more information on N42 3 and N45 target device data table addresses refer to N Files on page C 8 Selecting the Controller 1 Start RSLogix 500 The RSLogix 500 window appears Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Figure 4 42 Figure 4 42 MicroLogix 1100 Select Processor Type Screen Select Processor Type Processor Name EX4MPLE Micrologix 1500 LO Series D MicroLogix 1500 LSP Series A MicroLogix Series C 1 or 2 Comm Ports MicruLlvyix Series B MicroLogix Series Micruluyix Anualuy MicroLogix DH 485 HDSlave MicroLogix 24 115 VAC 16 RIY Out 24 115 V C 16 TRIAC Out 24 DC SNK In 16 RLY Out 24 DC SNK In 16 TRANS SRC Out 1747 L40L 24 DC SRC In 16 TR NS SNK Out Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernct 49 D i Who Active 1n Ser 61 Octal Assign a name for the processor In the list select the MicroLogix 1100 Then select the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application and click OK The RSLogix 500 project window appears Creating MicroLogix 1100 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout 1 2 In the RSLogix 500 project window treeview under Program Files double click on LAD 2 Insert a ladder rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MG
105. 49 N226 0 249 N227 0 1 N227 2 249 N228 0 249 Number of parameters Parameters 1 124 int Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters Parameters 1 124 int Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters Parameters 1 124 int Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters Parameters 1 124 int Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters Parameters 1 124 int Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters Parameters 1 124 int Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters Parameters 1 124 int Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 he DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 he DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 he DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 he DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 he DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 he DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 he DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters n
106. 5 2 N101 4 N101 4 N100 11 1 N101 5 N100 10 1 F105 3 N101 6 2 N101 6 N100 15 1 N101 7 N100 14 1 Using Explicit Messaging 6 27 Data conversion COPs for fifth parameter write 000 COP Copy File Source 8F105 4 Dest N101 8 Length 2 COP Copy File Source N101 8 Dest N100 19 Length 1 f COP Copy File Source N101 9 Dest N100 18 Length 1 B3 0 EEM f EtherNevIP Explicit Message CEN 5 34 3 Control Block N16 0 CDN gt Control Block Length 58 CER gt Setup Screen lt For each parameter being written to three COP Copy instructions are required to convert the 16 bit integer data table addresses for example N100 2 Least Significant Word and N100 3 Most Significant Word for the first parameter to a 32 bit REAL floating point data table address F105 0 for correct presentation The first COP instruction correctly writes the 32 bit REAL floating point value The second and third COP instructions swap the LSW and MSW PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 28 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Figure 6 32 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens EEM N16 0 98 Elements Send Dara Receive Data Del Remove Hop r EEM N16 0 58 Elements General Mubittop S
107. A EN P 8 10 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Figure 8 7 Example of Port 00 PowerFlex 755 Drive Diagnostic Items Page Ga Port 0 PowerFl D Module inform Diagnostics Fault queue D Alarm queue Gi Port 1 Not Ava Gi Port 2 1203 US Gi Port 3 20 HIM Ca Port 4 DeviceN Ca Port 5 Not Ava Gi Port 6 20 COMI Ca Port 7 Not Ava Ca Port 8 Not Ava Ca Port 9 Not Ava Ca Port 10 Not Av Ca Port 11 Not Av Gi Port 12 Not Av Ca Port 13 EtherN Ca Port 14 Device D Online user manui Software tools We Launch my DriveE S Launch my DriveE 23 E mail technical s Expand Minimize D Home 2 Process display D TCP IP configurati D Configure e mall n Ga Browse devices amp I Port 0 PowerFli Module informi Diagnostics D Fault queue D Alarm D Software tools We S Launch my DriveE S Launch my DriveE 3 E mail technical s gt PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P o OG OO uv awh Description MCB Pwrup Time PBLT Pwrup Time PBLT GatesOnTime Reserved PBLT mWHrs DAC Update Sel Spd Ref Command Theta Adjust 1 Theta Adjust 2 IqsCmd DC Tests IdsCmd DC Tests Pwr Device Drop Pwr Device Dynam Active PWM Freq SRegCnfg InfoSel SRegCnfgInfoSrc SRegCnfgInfoData FV Control Sts ASA Serial Num CEP Slot4 Errors SEP Slot4 Errors CEP Slot5 Errors Fault code Description 83 Port 3 DPI Loss 83 Port 3 DPI
108. A6 can be used to configure PowerFlex 750 Series drives and their connected peripherals Hold Last When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond by holding last Hold last results in the drive receiving the last data received via the network connection before the disruption If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will continue to run at the same Reference Idle Action An idle action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when the controller is switched out of run mode I O Data I O data sometimes called implicit messages or input output is time critical data such as a Logic Command and Reference The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of view Output is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller IP Addresses A unique IP address identifies each node on an EtherNet IP network An IP address consists of 32 bits that are divided into four segments of one byte each It appears as four decimal integers separated by periods XXX XXX XXX XXX Each xxx can have a decimal value from 0 to 255 For example an IP address could be 192 168 0 1 An IP address has two parts a network ID and a host ID The class of network determines the format of the address 0 1 7 15 23 31 Class A 0
109. Address Label Location Ethernet Address MAC label location Ethernet Connector 9 9 9 Drive Control Pod 2 Onacomputer connected to the EtherNet IP network start the BOOTP software The BOOTP Server window Figure 3 2 appears PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the Adapter 3 3 Figure 3 2 BOOTP Server Window B3 BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Fie Tools Hep Request History fhe mav sec Etthemet Address MAL IP Address 13 30 59 13 30 54 00 00 8C 08 60 09 13 30 51 00 00 8C 08 60 09 Ethemet Addeess MAC Type IP Address Hostname 3 To properly configure devices on your EtherNet IP network you must configure settings in the BOOTP software to match the network Select Tools gt Network Settings to display the Network Settings window Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 Network Settings Window Request History ftemevsec Type Ethemet Address MAL IP Address Hostname Network Settings 255 255 10 9 131 200 131 200 na home ra int com OK Cancel Status Erhnes 0 of 256 4 Edit the following Box Type Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the embedded EtherNet IP adapter s network Gateway The IP address of the
110. Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable In this example we are writing to five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each parameter being written to requires four contiguous 16 bit words Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size The data structure format is shown in Figure 6 36 on page 6 31 Maximum length is 128 words which equates to 32 parameters 3 Service Code 4E write messages are written to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important Be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 29 SLC 500 Example Scattered Write Request Data In this example we use the F105 data table addresses to store the request values to be written to these 32
111. Comm Format Data DINT This setting formats the data in 32 bit words IP Address The IP address of the adapter Open Module When this box is checked the drive s New Module screen will close Properties when clicking OK When unchecked additional module properties screens will appear to further configure the drive adapter when OK is clicked For this example check this box Under Connection Parameters edit the following Assembly pini Instance Size Input 1 This value The value will vary based on the number of DL From Net is required xx parameters used for your application see details below Output 2 This value The value will vary based on the number of DL To Net xx is required parameters used for your application see details below Configuration 6 This value 0 This value is required is required Enter the number of 32 bit words that are required for your I O in the Input Size and Output Size boxes Since the adapter always uses the 32 bit Logic Status 32 bit Feedback and a 32 bit word dedicated for memory allocation of the Generic Ethernet module profile at least three 32 bit words must be set for the Input Size The adapter also uses the 32 bit Logic Command and 32 bit Reference requiring at least two 32 bit words for the Output Size If any or all of the drive s sixteen 32 bit Datalinks are used see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy on page 3 8 or Custom Peer I O Configuration on page 3 1
112. Controller Channel 1 Integral Communication Command 500CPU Write Dota Table Address Nann Size in Elements LJ Taget Device Message Tena Dala Table Address Local Remote MuliHop Routing Information File RI Control Bits Ignore d med a T0 0 Break Connection RK n Awaiting Fxecution FW n Free FR 0 Message done DN o Message Transmitting ST ml Message Enabled IEN Error Eno Code Hex 0 This Controller data for MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Write The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Since the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Write command type was selected to write the control timeout value to the drive Data Table Address N20 0 An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written Size in Elements 1 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address N42 3 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive Routing Information File MultiHop Tab Box To Address RI9 0 An
113. D The Logic Status is used to monitor the PowerFlex 750 Series drive for example operating state motor direction It consists of one 32 bit word of input from the adapter to the network The definitions of the bits in this word are shown in Appendix D Master Slave Hierarchy An adapter configured for a master slave hierarchy exchanges data with the master device Usually a network has one scanner which is the master device and all other devices for example drives connected to EtherNet IP adapters are slave devices On a network with multiple scanners called a multimaster hierarchy each slave device must have a scanner specified as a master NVS Non Volatile Storage NVS is the permanent memory of a device Devices such as the adapter and drive store parameters and other information in NVS so that they are not lost when the device loses power NVS is sometimes called EEPROM PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command PCCC is the protocol used by some controllers to communicate with devices on a network Some software products for example DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive also use PCCC to communicate Peer to Peer Hierarchy An adapter that is configured for a peer to peer hierarchy can exchange data with a device on the network that is not a scanner This type of PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P G 6 Glossary hierarchy can be set u
114. Divisor UINT Base INT Offset 9 USINT 3 Link source of the value 0 no link USINT Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 16 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS 9 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory 11 Get Set DPI Link USINT 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance UINT ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 16 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 16 Get Parameter Processing USINT 0 No error Error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 18 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 15 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 19 Get International DPI Online Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN I
115. Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Components Drive Control Pod Getting Started Chapter 1 The EtherNet IP adapter embedded on the Main Control Board in PowerFlex 755 drives is used for network communication Topic Page Components 14 Features 12 Compatible Products 1 3 Required Equipment 1 3 Safety Precautions 14 Quick Start 1 5 Status Indicators 1 6 Figure 1 1 Components of the Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter shown with HIM bezel open and drive cover removed Drive STS Indicator D Item Part Description Status Two LEDs that indicate the Indicators status of the adapter and network communications Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting IP Address Switches Sets the IP address of the embedded adapter when not using BOOTP or adapter parameters Refer to Setting the IP Address Switches on page 2 2 Ethernet Connector An RJ 45 connector for the Ethernet cable The connector is CAT 5 compliant to ensure reliable data transfer on 100Base TX Ethernet connections DPIPort2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Cable connection for handheld and remote options 1 2 Getting Started F
116. Fit Cfg Logic parameter B 6 Fit Cfg Ref parameter B 6 Fr Peer Addr 1 4 parameters B 8 Fr Peer Enable parameter B 8 Fr Peer Status parameter B 8 Fr Peer Timeout parameter B 8 full duplex see duplex PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P G gateway G 3 gateway address setting with BOOTP 3 2 setting with parameters 3 5 Gateway Cfg 1 4 parameters B 4 H half duplex see duplex hardware address definition G 3 in diagnostic item 7 4 on label 3 2 HIM Human Interface Module accessing parameters with 3 1 definition G 4 hold last configuring the adapter for 3 14 definition G 4 host IDs G 4 yo about 5 1 configuring for ControlLogix 4 2 MicroLogix 1100 4 37 PLC 5 4 21 SLC 500 4 29 definition G 4 limitations when using MicroLogix 1100 4 20 PLC 5 4 20 SLC 500 4 20 understanding the I O image 5 2 using with ControlLogix 5 6 MicroLogix 1100 5 14 PLC 5 5 14 SLC 500 5 14 Identity object C 2 idle action G 4 Idle Fit Action parameter B 5 installation applying power to the adapter 2 4 commissioning the adapter 2 6 connecting to the network 2 4 preparing for 2 1 IP Addr Cfg 1 4 parameters B 3 Index 3 IP address definition classes G 4 setting with BOOTP 3 2 setting with parameters 3 5 L LCD HIM 3 1 LEDs see status indicators LINK status indicator locating 1 6 troubleshooting with 7 2 Logic Command Status bi
117. Flex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P B 2 Adapter Parameters Parameter List Parameter No Name and Description DL From Net 01 DL From Net 02 DL From Net 03 DL From Net 04 DL From Net 05 DL From Net 06 DL From Net 07 DL From Net 08 DL From Net 09 DL From Net 10 DL From Net 11 DL From Net 12 DL From Net 13 DL From Net 14 DL From Net 15 DL From Net 16 Sets the port number and parameter number to which the selected Datalinks should connect Each selected port parameter will be written with data received from the network These are parameters written by the controller outputs from the controller If setting the value manually the parameter value 10000 port number destination parameter number For example suppose you want to use Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 to write to Parameter 01 of an optional encoder card plugged into drive Port 5 The value for Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 would be 50001 10000 5 1 DL To Net 01 DL To Net 02 DL To Net 03 DL To Net 04 DL To Net 05 DL To Net 06 DL To Net 07 DL To Net 08 DL To Net 09 DL To Net 10 DL To Net 11 DL To Net 12 DL To Net 13 DL To Net 14 DL To Net 15 DL To Net 16 Sets the port number and parameter number to which the selected Datalinks should connect Each selected port parameter will be read and their values
118. International parameter name STRINGN International online units 20 Get International DPI Online Struct of Read Full BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default value UINT Next UINT Previous UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset USINT 3 Link USINT Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor UDINT Extended Descriptor see page C 32 22 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Read Full BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad word always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset BOOL 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International DPI parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in t
119. LSW 35 Parameter Value MSW 124 Parameter Number LSW 125 Parameter Number MSW 126 Parameter Value LSW 127 Parameter Value MSW PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 44 Using Explicit Messaging Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Understanding the Status Indicators Troubleshooting Chapter 7 This chapter provides information for diagnosing and troubleshooting potential problems with the adapter and network Topic Understanding the Status Indicators Page 7 1 ENET Status Indicator u LINK Status Indicator 7 2 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 7 3 Viewing and Clearing Events i The adapter has two status indicators They can be viewed with the HIM bezel closed or open Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Status Indicators Embedded EtherNet IP adapter indicators on main control board in drive control pod Page o ENET EtherNet IP Connection Status 7 2 Indicators shown with HIM bezel closed and drive cover installed T FOOOOO GEJS e LINK EtherNet IP Transmit Sta
120. LSW 15 Parameter Value MSW 16 Parameter Number LSW 17 Parameter Number MSW 18 Parameter Value LSW 19 Parameter Value MSW 20 Parameter Number LSW 21 Parameter Number MSW 22 Parameter Value LSW 23 Parameter Value MSW 24 Parameter Number LSW 25 Parameter Number MSW 26 Parameter Value LSW 27 Parameter Value MSW 28 Parameter Number LSW 29 Parameter Number MSW 30 Parameter Value LSW 31 Parameter Value MSW 32 Parameter Number LSW 33 Parameter Number MSW 34 Parameter Value LSW 35 Parameter Value MSW 124 Parameter Number LSW 125 Parameter Number MSW 126 Parameter Value LSW 127 Parameter Value MSW 6 31 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 32 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 Example When using RSLogix 500 v7 10 or lower explicit messaging must be performed using the PCCC N File method For RSLogix 500 v7 20 or higher the CIP messaging method has been added along with the PCCC N File method However the CIP method is recommended because it is easier to use and understand For this reason only instructions for the CIP method are provided Important Due to inherent limitations with the PCCC N File method only contiguous multiple parameters can be read or written
121. Languages Supported STRUCT of USINT Number of Languages USINT n Language Codes see Class Attribute 2 16 Get Date of Manufacture STRUCT of UINT Year USINT Month USINT Day 17 Get Product Revision STRUCT of USINT Major Firmware Release USINT Minor Firmware Release 18 Get Serial Number UDINT Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 19 Set Language Selected USINT 0 Default HIM will prompt at start up 1 Language was selected no prompt 20 Set Customer Generated Firmware STRING 36 GUID Globally Unique Identifier identifying customer firmware flashed into the device 30 Get International Status Text STRINGN Text describing the status of device with support for Unicode 31 Get Set International User Definable Text STRINGN Text identifying the device with a user supplied name with support for Unicode 34 Get Key Information STRUCT of UDINT Rating Code UDINT Device Serial Number UINT Customization Code UINT Customization Revision UINT Brand Code USINT Family Code USINT Config Code USINT Language Code USINT Major Revision USINT Minor Revision USINT Customer Generated Firmware UUID 35 Get NVS CRC UDINT A 32 bit CRC of the Non Volatile Storage in a device 39 Get SI Drive Code UINT Code identifying the protocol between the device and host 128 Get Customization Code UINT Code identifying the customized device 129 Get Customization Revision Number UINT Revision of the customized device 130 Get Customization Device Text STRING 32
122. List structure for the desired time zone 8 Get Active Time Zone Data Struct of INT Standard bias USINT Standard month USINT Standard day of week USINT Standard week USINT Standard hour USINT Standard minute USINT Standard second INT Daylight offset USINT Daylight month USINT Daylight day of week USINT Daylight week USINT Daylight hour USINT Daylight minute USINT Daylight second 9 Get Set Custom Time Zone Data Struct of INT Standard bias USINT Standard month USINT Standard day of week USINT Standard week USINT Standard hour USINT Standard minute USINT Standard second INT Daylight offset USINT Daylight month USINT Daylight day of week USINT Daylight week USINT Daylight hour USINT Daylight minute USINT Daylight second Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Read Full STRUCT of STRING 16 Name of the timer LWORD or Elapsed time in milliseconds unless timer is a real STRUCT __ time clock see attribute 2 BOOL 16 See Attribute 3 1 Get Timer Text STRING 16 Name of the timer 2 Get Set Timer Value LWORD Elapsed time in milliseconds unless the timer is a Or real time clock STRUCT of Real Time Clock Data UINT Milliseconds 0 999 USINT Seconds 0 59 USINT Minutes 0 59 USINT Hours 0 23 USINT Days 1 31 USINT Months 1 January 12 December USINT Years since 1972 3 Get Timer Descriptor BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0
123. M Mask attribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 1111 15 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit4 Bit 16 is the least significant bit 17 Extended Data Type Bit 5 E jenen i used as an array of Boolean 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 010 Reserved y 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 May be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object e Intelligent offline tools make use of the Limits Object to select limits and units 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download Parameter shall always be included in uplo
124. MSW 28 Parameter Number LSW 29 Parameter Number MSW 30 Parameter Value LSW 31 Parameter Value MSW 32 Parameter Number LSW 33 Parameter Number MSW 34 Parameter Value LSW 35 Parameter Value MSW 124 Parameter Number LSW 125 Parameter Number MSW 126 Parameter Value LSW 127 Parameter Value MSW 1 Parameter Number MSW 2 Parameter Value LSW 3 Parameter Value MSW 4 Parameter Number LSW 5 Parameter Number MSW 6 Parameter Value LSW 7 Parameter Value MSW 8 Parameter Number LSW 9 Parameter Number MSW 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number LSW 13 Parameter Number MSW 14 Parameter Value LSW 15 Parameter Value MSW 16 Parameter Number LSW 17 Parameter Number MSW 18 Parameter Value LSW 19 Parameter Value MSW 20 Parameter Number LSW 21 Parameter Number MSW 22 Parameter Value LSW 23 Parameter Value MSW 24 Parameter Number LSW 25 Parameter Number MSW 26 Parameter Value LSW 27 Parameter Value MSW 28 Parameter Number LSW 29 Parameter Number MSW 30 Parameter Value LSW 31 Parameter Value MSW 32 Parameter Number LSW 33 Parameter Number MSW 34 Parameter Value
125. Maximum Type Default Values Type Reset Required Default Values Type Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required B 3 13 13 Read Only 0 0 16 Read Only 0 0 16 Read Only 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Write Yes 0 Switches 0 Switches 1 Parameters 2 BOOTP Read Only eOoooccoc 255 Read Write Yes eOooocc 255 Read Write Yes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P B 4 Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Sets the bytes of the gateway address 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg l Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Important To set the gateway address using these parameters Parameter 36 BOOTP must be set to 0 Disabled Net Rate Cfg Sets the network data rate at which the adapter communicates Updates Parameter 51 Net Rate Act after a reset Net Rate Act Displays the actual network data rate used by the adapter Web Enable Enables disables the adapter web page features Web Features Enables disables the Web configurable e mail notification feature Details Default Default
126. N A 1788 Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device 1788 FNRT A 1788 10 100 Mix Fthernet Bride P 1788 FWFR A 1788 10 100 Moss Fthernet Bridge w Fnhr 1794 AFNT A 1794 10 100 Mins Ethernet Adapter Twisted Par Media DrivelogixS730 Ethernet Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on DriveLogixS730 ETHERNET SRIDGE Generic EtherNet IP CIP Bridge EtherNet iP SoftLogx5800 EtherNet IP PHP SSCENA A Ethernet Adapter Iwicted Par Media i Drives i HMI wv Lat d Find Arid Favorite By Category DyVende Favorites rm PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 4 16 Configuring the I O 2 Select ETHERNET MODULFE from the list Figure 4 19 to configure the drive and its embedded EtherNet IP adapter and then click OK The drive s New Module screen Figure 4 20 appears Figure 4 20 Drive New Module Screen New Module ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethermet Module AlenBradey My EtherNet IP Bridge My Powerflex 755 Dive Connection Parameters Ascembly Instance Input 1 zl gan Uutput z Aj 32b Conn Foma Daa DINT X Configuration 0 zj pHa Address Host Name erana jl IP Ades w y Ww C Host Name Open Module Properties Cancel Helo Edit the following information about the drive adapter Box Setting Name A name to identify the drive and adapter Description Optional description of the drive adapter
127. Net 06 538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 23 DL To Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 24 DL To Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 25 DL To Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 26 DL To Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 27 DL To Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 28 DL To Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 29 DL To Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 30 DL To Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 31 DL To Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 32 DL To Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 TIP The DL From Net xx parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter The DL To Net xx parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 23 Creating RSLogix 5 v7 or higher Project To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Note that three messages need to be configured The timeout message
128. Net xx Datalink used to write to drive or peripheral parameters must be accounted for in the controller input image e An additional 32 bit word for each DL To Net xx Datalink used to read data must be accounted for in the controller output image PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 30 Configuring the I O Adapter Parameter Settings for SLC 500 Example These adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Adapter Parameter Value Description 01 DL From Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 02 DL From Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 03 DL From Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 04 DL From Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 05 DL From Net 05 1537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 06 DL From Net 06 1538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 07 DL From Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 08 DL From Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 09 DL From Net 09 1557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 10 DL From Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 11 DL From Net 11 1572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 12 DL From Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Pr
129. Network ID Host ID 0 1 7 15 23 31 Class B 1 0 Network ID Host ID 012 7 15 23 31 Class C 1110 Network ID Host ID The number of devices on your EtherNet IP network will vary depending on the number of bytes that are used for the network address In many cases you are given a network with a Class C address in which PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Glossary G 5 the first three bytes contain the network address subnet mask 255 255 255 0 This leaves 8 bits or 256 addresses on your network Because two addresses are reserved for special uses 0 is an address for the network usually used by the router and 255 is an address for broadcast messages to all network devices you have 254 addresses to use on a Class C address block To ensure that each device on the Internet has a unique address contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider for unique fixed IP addresses You can then set the unique IP address for the adapter by using a BOOTP server or by manually configuring parameters in the adapter The adapter reads the values of these parameters only at power up Logic Command Logic Status The Logic Command is used to control the PowerFlex 750 Series drive for example start stop direction It consists of one 32 bit word of output to the adapter from the network The definitions of the bits in this word are shown in Appendix
130. O Data 14 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 15 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 15 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 17 DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DL From Net 04 DL From Net 05 DL From Net 06 DL From Net OF DL From Net 08 DL From Net 09 DL From Net 10 DL From Net 11 DL From Net 12 DL From Net 13 DL From Net 14 DL From Net 15 DL From Net 16 Saving the I O Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer B gt TIP When using RSLogix 5000 v16 or higher you can add the I O configuration of a Generic Profile while the controller is online and in the Run mode PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 1 5 Configuring the I O 4 19 In the RSLogix 5000 window select Communications gt Download The Download dialog box Figure 4 24 appears Figure 4 24 Download Dialog Box Download Download offline project 15 Example using Embd ENet for PF 755 to the controller Connected Controller Name v15 Example using Embd ENet for PF 755 Type 1756 L63 4 ControlLogix5563 Controller Path AB_ETHIP 1410 91 100 80 Backplane 0 Serial Number O027D274 Security No Protection amp y DANGER The controller image stored in nonvolatile m
131. OOL 2 15 Reserved 2 Get International Alarm Text STRINGN Text describing the alarm with support for Unicode PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P DPI Diagnostic Object Attribute ID 1 Class Code Hexadecimal 0x99 Services Service Code Ox0E Decimal 153 Implemented for EtherNet IP Objects C 23 Class Yes Instance Yes Service Name Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Instances Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single The number of instances depends on the maximum number of diagnostic items in the device The total number of diagnostic items can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex 0x0000 Ox3FFF Dec 0 16383 Device Host Drive Example Description 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 Ox43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Diagnostic Item 1 0x4400 Ox47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 Port 2 2 Drive Diagnostic Item 2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 Ox53FF 20480 21503 Port 4 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 Port 5 0x5800 OxSBFF 22528 23551 Port 6 0x5C00 Ox5FFF 23552 24575 Port 7 0x6000 Ox63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 Ox6BFF 26624
132. Optional 1 For definitions of these terms refer to the Glossary Click OK to apply the settings The adapter appears in the Relation List Figure 3 5 with the new settings Figure 3 5 BOOTP Server Window with Adapter in the Relation List Ka BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Fie Tools Help Request History hemevsec Type Ethemet Address MAE IP Address Hostname 13 31 00 00 00 8C 08 60 09 10 91 100 79 EmbdENet621A 13 30 59 00 00 8C 08 60 09 13 30 54 00 00 8C 08 60 09 13 30 51 00 00 8C 08 60 09 lelahon List New Ethemet Addess MAC Type IP Address Hostname 0 00 8C 08 60 09 10 91 100 79 9 To assign this configuration to the adapter permanently select the device in the Relation List and click Disable BOOTP DHCP When power is cycled on the adapter it will use the configuration you assigned it and not issue new BOOTP requests TIP To enable BOOTP for an embedded adapter that has had BOOTP disabled first select the adapter in the Relation List then click Enable BOOTP and finally reset the adapter or power cycle the drive 10 To save the Relation List select File gt Save PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address Configuring the Adapter 3 5 By default the adapter is configured to set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address using a BOOTP server If you want
133. PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter USER MANUAL Firmware Version 1 xxx ALLEN BRADLEY ROCKWELL SOFTWARE Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at_http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this
134. Q Configuration tool such as Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM 20 HIM A6 C6S DriveExplorer version 6 01 or higher DriveExecutive stand alone software version 5 01 or higher or bundled with the DriveTools SP suite version 5 01 or higher BOOTP Server version 2 1 or higher for network setup only Q Controller configuration software such as RSLogix 5 500 5000 Q A PC connection to the EtherNet IP network PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 1 4 Getting Started Safety Precautions Please read the following safety precautions carefully gt gt bb gt gt PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Only personnel familiar with drive and power products and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up configuration and subsequent maintenance of the drive using this embedded adapter Failure to comply may result in injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The embedded adapter contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures refer to Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000
135. ST 0 Message F rable FN n Tract Device Message Timeout 33 Local Remote Local MuliHop Yee Fxternber Roading Info File RCX Rrx16 0 Enor Service Service Code then Claes hes Y Instance hex Attribute hex dec Erce Description No enos Eno Code Hex 0 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single write message General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address F50 0 9 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the request file Size in Bytes 4 4 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX16 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Generic Set Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 535 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 or 10 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Servic
136. Skip parameter B 9 tools required 1 3 troubleshooting 7 1 to 7 5 U UDDT User Defined Data Type G 7 UDP User Datagram Protocol G 7 update see flash update PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P V Virtual DPI Parameter object C 28 W Web Enable parameter B 4 Web Features parameter B 4 web pages enabling with parameter 3 16 for the adapter 8 1 to 8 11 web site for DriveExecutive software G 2 DriveExplorer software G 2 DriveTools SP software G 2 EDS files G 2 EtherNet IP G 2 manuals P 1 ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association G 2 RSLogix 5 500 5000 G 6 wiring see cables Z zero data configuring the adapter for 3 14 definition G 7 Index 5 Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Index 6 Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives www rockwellautomation com Power Conirol and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36
137. Text identifying the customized device PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 12 EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 3 Get Component Name STRING 32 Name of the component 4 Get Component Firmware Revision STRUCT of USINT Major Revision USINT Minor Revision 8 Get Component Serial Number UDINT Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 9 Get International Component Name STRINGN Name of the component with support for Unicode PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P DPI Parameter Object Attribute ID 0 Access Rule Get Instances Hex 0x0000 Ox3FFF EtherNet IP Objects C 13 Class Code Hexadecimal 0x93 Decimal 147 To access Host Config parameters use the Host DPI Parameter Object Class Code Ox9F Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Dec 0 16383 Device Example Host Drive 0 Description Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 0x4800 0x4BFF Port 1 2 Drive Parameter 2 Attributes Port 2 18432 19455 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 Port3
138. The table below lists the parameters for the Get Attributes Scattered and Set Attributes Scattered object specific service Name Data Type Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter to read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value to read or write zero when reading PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 34 EtherNet IP Objects TCP IP Interface Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF5 245 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 UINT The revision of this object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Status of TCP IP UDINT 0 Not configured Network Interface 1 Valid configuration 2 to 15 Reserved 2 Get Configuration Capability UDINT Bit Value 0 False 1 True 0 Supports BOOTP 1 DNS Client able to resolve host names by query to DNS server 2 DHCP Client able to obtain network configuration through DHCP 3 DHCP DNS Update able to send its host name in the DHCP request 4 Configuration Settable able to set the network configuration via TCP IP object
139. To Net 13 Preset Speed 4 DL To Net 14 Preset Speed 5 DL To Net 15 Preset Speed 6 DL To Net 16 Preset Speed 7 woh SPP WWIN t n lr ie lke OOM oO nN oO MW ON oO o jojojo DL To Net Decimal Wu Decimal DINT Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL Float REAL e PiPlP ile n o m ol j u m O O On ono nn Nl elo oOo N N n o oj jojojo b TIP To determine the Data Type of a parameter refer to the Data Type column in the chapter containing parameters in the PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drives User Manual publication 750 UMOOI PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 5 14 Using the I O PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Example Adapter Parameter Settings For the adapter settings used for the example ladder logic program in this section Refer to the Table on Controller Type page 4 22 PLC 5 page 4 30 SLC 500 page 4 38 MicroLogix 1100 Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses Since PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 controllers are 16 bit platforms being used with the 32 bit embedded EtherNet IP adapter the data will be transposed from the least significant word LSW to the most significant word MSW in the controller When the I O was configured Chapter 4 an available data table file
140. Updates web site for downloading product specific firmware update files e Match Drive This button is useful when the drive being added to the network matches the drive profile revision rating Datalinks configuration settings etc of an existing online network drive Clicking this button conveniently creates a duplicate drive profile from the online drive and automatically loads this identical information into the Module Definition screen This eliminates the need to manually enter the information each time a new drive with a matching profile is added to the network On the Module Definition screen notice that the Drive Status Feedback Logic Command and Reference are always used However when using Datalinks you must still assign adapter Parameters 01 16 DL From Net 01 16 and Parameters 17 32 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 8 Configuring the I O DL To Net 01 16 to point to the appropriate drive or connected peripheral parameters The procedure to configure the Datalinks on the Module Definition screen for the Input Data and Output Data is the same A Click the button in the topmost blank row to display the Parameter Properties screen for the corresponding Datalink Important Always use the Datalink parameters in consecutive numerical order starting with the first parameter For example use Parameters 01 02 and 03 to configure 3 Dat
141. Volts Figure 6 45 Example Scattered Read Request Data File Data File N70 dec MicroLogix 1100 Example Scattered Read Response Data In this example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 46 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters These values have been converted using a CPW Copy Word instruction for correct presentation Figure 6 46 Example Scattered Read Response Data File Data File 100 fe c 0 1 4 In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Address Read Value 1 Output Frequency F100 0 60 42899 Hz 7 Output Current F100 1 2 392873 Amp 8 Output Voltage F100 2 208 9161 VAC 9 Output Power F100 3 0 2103399 kW 11 DC Bus Voltage F100 4 283 0867 VDC PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 39 MicroLogix 1100 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters A Custom scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 577 Preset
142. adapter parameters except the following which are used for network setup Parameter 36 BOOTP Parameters 38 through 41 IP Addr Cfg 1 4 Parameters 42 through 45 Subnet Cfg 1 4 Parameters 46 through 49 Gateway Cfg 1 4 Parameter 50 Net Rate Cfg To restore adapter parameters to their factory default values 1 Access the Status screen which is displayed on HIM power up Figure 3 19 Status Screen 2 Use the EE or IBS key to scroll to Port 13 which is the port always dedicated to the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Press the key to display its last viewed folder Use the WE or BS key to scroll to the MEMORY folder Use the A or key to select Set Defaults Press the Enter key to display the Set Defaults pop up box nuo 5 om ROS Press the Enter key again to display the warning pop up box to reset parameters to their factory default values PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 3 18 Configuring the Adapter Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters Flash Updating the Adapter 8 Press the MOST soft key to restore MOST parameters to factory defaults or press the ALL soft key to restore ALL parameters Or press the ESC soft key to cancel Important When performing a Set Defaults the drive may detect a conflict and then not allow this function to occur If this happens first resolve the conflict and then repeat
143. ads and downloads PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 32 EtherNet IP Objects Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OxFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OXFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OXFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OXFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance OXFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance OXFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance OxFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OXFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OXFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OXFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 number of decimal places to be displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates 18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2 to not limit the number of decimal places used 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter
144. alinks to write data and or Parameters 17 18 19 20 and 21 to configure 5 Datalinks to read data Otherwise the network I O connection will be larger than necessary which needlessly increases controller response time and memory usage Figure 4 10 Example Datalink Parameter Properties Screen Module Definition x 1 x 5 X Compatible Module 200V 4 84 ND 4 8 HD osabec Parameter Sort by Parameter Name F Use Network Reference HHHHHHEHEHSHS EA EA EA EA EA EA HE HI E pected hazardous molion of machinery may occur ang soltware to conhgure diwe selected for the Input and Output Data appear as etwcen controle and dive is determined by Datalink load Configuration to the dive to ensure that the and commurscalion module configuations are other Cancel __ Heb B In the Port field click the pull down list and select the port of the device to which this Datalink will be assigned for this example Port 0 the PowerFlex 755 drive C In the Parameter field click the pull down list for the selected device and select the parameter to which this Datalink will point for this example drive parameter 370 Stop Mode AJ D Click OK to complete configuration of the Datalink The name of the parameter that this Datalink points to is now shown in the row on the Module Definition screen E Repeat Steps 5A through 5D for each Datalink being configured PowerFlex
145. ameter Value Description 01 DL From Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 02 DL From Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 03 DL From Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 04 DL From Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 05 DL From Net 05 1537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 06 DL From Net 06 1538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 07 DL From Net 07 1539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 08 DL From Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 09 DL From Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 10 DL From Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 11 DL From Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 12 DL From Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 13 DL From Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 14 DL From Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 15 DL From Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 16 DL From Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 17 DL To Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 18 DL To Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 19 DL To Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 20 DL To Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 21 DL To Net 05 537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 22 DL To
146. arameters via Datalinks default the controller tags for the Datalinks use the drive parameter names to which they are assigned When selecting Datalinks the controller tags for the Datalinks have non descriptive UserDefinedData n names like those used in RSLogix 5000 v15 Data Format Parameters When the Connection field is set to Parameters via Datalinks Parameters is automatically selected When the Connection field is set to Datalinks you must select the number of Datalinks required for your application in the Data Format field Input Data Assigns selected drive or connected peripheral parameters to be READ by the controller using DL To Net Datalinks See Steps 5A through 5E below for details Output Data Assigns selected drive or connected peripheral parameters to be WRITTEN to the controller using DL From Net Datalinks See Steps 5A through 5E below for details Use Network Reference Box Conveniently selects the speed reference for the drive to come from the network This box is checked by default Three buttons at the bottom left of the Module Definition screen are provided for your convenience to perform specific functions e Create Database Clicking this button enables you to create a database from an online network device Thereafter the database appears in the list for selection on the Module Definition screen e Web Update Clicking this button opens the Allen Bradley Web
147. ase 2 Drive 208 240V v Powertlex 700S 29 400V E PowerFlex 7005 Phase 2 Dnve PowerFlex 7005 2P 600V E PowerFlex 7005 Phase 2 Drive i PrwerFlev 7005 200V F PowerFlex 7005 Dri PowerFlex 700S 400V E PowerFlex 700S Drive 400 PowerFlex 700S 600V E PowerFlex 7005 Drive 600v via 20 COMM E Powerflex 755 NETC Powerflex 755 Drive via 20 COM Powertiex 7000 2 PowerFlex 7000 2 Dnve via 704 PowerFlex 7000 E PowerFlex 7000 Co PowerFlex DC 200V E PowerFlex DC Dr v PowerFlex DC 400V E PowerFlex DC 600V E Find Add Favore Favorites J OK Cancel Help 2 From the list Figure 4 7 select the drive and its connected adapter For this example we selected PowerFlex 755 EENET Then click OK The drive s New Module screen Figure 4 8 appears PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 4 6 Configuring the I O Figure 4 8 Drive New Module Screen MB New Module General Connection Module Ifo Port Configuration Deve Powerflex 755 EENET Powerflex 755 Dave Alen Bradey My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge Module Definition Senes None ce Compatible Module Revision 11 Bectronic Keying Connection Parameters vis Datainis Data Format Parameters 3 Onthe General tab edit the following data about the drive adapter 4 5 Box Setting Name A name to identify the drive Description Optional description of the drive ada
148. ased there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 5 v7 or higher project until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 we need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and the drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks Since the adapter always uses the 32 bit Logic Status and 32 bit Feedback at least two 32 bit words must be accounted for in the controller input image The adapter also uses the 32 bit Logic Command and 32 bit Reference requiring at least two 32 bit words that must be accounted for in the controller output image If any or all of the drive s sixteen 32 bit Datalinks are used see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy on page 3 8 or Custom Peer I O Configuration on page 3 11 e An additional 32 bit word for each DL From Net xx Datalink used to write to drive or peripheral parameters must be accounted for in the controller input image PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 22 Configuring the I O e An additional 32 bit word for each DL To Net xx Datalink used to read data must be accounted for in the controller output image Adapter Parameter Settings for PLC 5 Example These adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Adapter Par
149. ased there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 500 v7 or higher project until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 we need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks Since the adapter always uses the 32 bit Logic Status and 32 bit Feedback at least two 32 bit words must be accounted for in the controller input image The adapter also uses the 32 bit Logic Command and 32 bit Reference requiring at least two 32 bit words that must be accounted for in the controller output image If any or all of the drive s sixteen 32 bit Datalinks are used see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy on page 3 8 or Custom Peer I O Configuration on page 3 11 e An additional 32 bit word for each DL From Net xx Datalink used to write to drive or peripheral parameters must be accounted for in the controller input image e An additional 32 bit word for each DL To Net xx Datalink used to read data must be accounted for in the controller output image PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 38 Configuring the I O Adapter Parameter Settings for MicroLogix 1100 Example These adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Adapte
150. ata Table Address Address Command Stop B3 20 0 Drive Stop N20 20 0 Command Start B3 20 1 Drive Start N20 20 1 Command Jog B3 20 2 Drive Jog N20 20 2 Command Clear Faults B3 20 3 Drive Clear Faults N20 20 3 Command Forward Reverse XIO B3 20 4 Drive Forward N20 20 4 Command Forward Reverse XIC B3 20 4 Drive Reverse N20 20 5 Speed Reference N30 22 Speed Reference N20 22 An example ladder logic program that uses these alternate controller data table addresses is shown in Figure 5 12 and Figure 5 13 Figure 5 12 PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Status Feedback N20 1 B3 1 ee 0 0 Drive Active Status Active N20 1 B3 1 jt C 1 1 Actual Direction Status Forward N20 1 B3 1 2 3 3 Actual Direction Status Reverse N20 1 B3 1 3t C 3 4 Drive Faulted Status Faulted N20 1 B3 l C 7 7 Drive At Speed Status At Speed N20 1 B3 1 JE Cy J C M 8 8 CPW Copy Word m Source N20 3 Dest F13 0 Length 2 Important This ladder does not include logic for Datalinks However if Datalinks are required and they are a REAL floating point data type a data conversion must be used For MicroLogix 1100 controllers only use a CPW Copy PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 5 18 Using the I O Word instruction as shown in the example ladder For
151. atalinks 1 4 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG11 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG11 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where Xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG11 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction Figure 4 29 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 30 Figure 4 29 PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datalinks MSG Read Write Message LEN 2 Control MG11 0 CDND Setup Screen CER 5 MG11 0 MG11 0 E CU DN EN MG11 0 ER Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 26 Configuring the I O Figure 4 30 PLC 5 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datalinks
152. ately 100 milliseconds Therefore using a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller is by far the much preferred method of controlling drives on EtherNet IP If you are not using either of these type of controllers then PowerFlex drives on EtherNet IP can be controlled with explicit messages using PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controllers with the following limitations e Anexplicit message is a much slower form of control and is non deterministic This means that you cannot guarantee how long the drive will take to start up or stop when the command is given Therefore all equipment used in this manner should be subject to a risk assessment taking into account the mechanical and electrical implementation e A timeout value in seconds in the drive will issue a drive fault if a message is not received from the controller within the specified time However the controller has no way of detecting a loss of communications to the drive until the next cycle of explicit messages This is another factor in the risk assessment e Any additional drives to be controlled will require additional explicit messages for their control and they need to be carefully sequenced Most controllers have small communication queues refer to its User Manual which need to be carefully managed if messages are not to be lost e Eachcontroller has a limited number of communication connections refer to its User Manual for maximum connections which will limit
153. ater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault boxes unchecked Click OK The new node My_PowerFlex_755_Drive in this example now appears under the bridge My EtherNet IP Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you double click on the Input and Output Controller Tags Figure 4 22 and Figure 4 23 you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 18 Configuring the I O My PowerFlex 755 Drive l My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data Figure 4 22 Input Image Controller Tags AB ETHERNET DINT 13 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data U My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 1 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 2 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 3 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 4 DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT Pad Word Logic Status Speed Feedback DL To Net 01 DL To Net 02 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 5 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l D ata 5 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 7 My PowerFle
154. ates the 32 bit REAL floating point value for example F101 0 which contains 11 1 seconds into two 16 bit integers for example N90 2 and N90 3 While the values in the 16 bit integer registers represent the actual values being written in the 32 bit floating point registers they will not appear correct but the message will properly decode them Figure 6 49 Example Scattered Write Request Unconverted Data File Data ile N90 dec SEE To complete message configuration the numbers of the parameters being written to must now be entered in the appropriate N90 data table registers as shown in Figure 6 50 for this example Figure 6 50 Example Scattered Write Request Unconverted Data File with Entered Parameters i Data File N90 dec PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 42 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 Example Scattered Write Response Data In this example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 51 to store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 51 Example Scattered Write Response Data File r Data File N80 dec TIP To verify that the parameter values were successfully written use the HIM DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive to access the parameters and view their newly written values PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherN
155. ation are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists If Explicit Messages are programmed to write parameter data to Non Volatile Storage NVS frequently the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a program that frequently uses Explicit Messages to write parameter data to NVS Datalinks do not write to NVS and should be used for frequently changed parameters Refer to Chapter 5 for information about the I O Image using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Explicit Messaging is used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates With Explicit Messaging you can configure and monitor a slave device s parameters on the network Important When an explicit message is performed by default no I O connection is made since it is an unconnected message When timing of the message transaction is important you can create a dedicated message connection between the controller and drive by checking the Connected box on the Communications tab message configuration screen during message setup These message connections are in addition to the I O connection However the trade off for
156. bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 577 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz Table 6 D Example Controller Tags for Write Multiple Parameter Messaging Program Operand Controller Tags for Write Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Write Message BOOL MSG Scattered Write Message MESSAGE Figure 6 10 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Write Multiple Execute Scattered Write Message MSG Message CEN Message Control Scattered Write Message CDN2 CFR2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 11 ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Figure 6 11 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Scattered_Wnte_Mcasage Message Configuration Scattered Write Message Configuration Communication Tag 755 Dive Browse Message Configuration Scattered_Writc_Message Path My_PowerFlex_ Configuration Communication Tag CIP Genese zi de Custom zl Massage ype Source Element Scatlered_Wiile_ Rey gt Service Co
157. bit REAL floating point parameters PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Address Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 F105 0 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 F105 1 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 F105 2 33 3 Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 F105 3 44 4 Hz 571 Preset Speed 7 F105 4 55 5 Hz Figure 6 33 shows the parameter values which in this example have been converted using a CPW Copy Word instruction one for each value to correctly write their values The CPW instruction separates the 32 bit REAL floating point value for example F105 0 which contains 11 1 seconds into two 16 bit integers for example N100 2 and N100 3 While the values in the 16 bit integer registers represent the actual values being written in the 32 bit floating point registers they will not appear correct but the message will properly decode them Figure 6 33 Example Scattered Write Request Unconverted Data File ic Data File N100 dec ife EE El Columns 10 To complete message configuration the numbers of the parameters being written to must now be entered in the appropriate N100 data table registers as shown in Figure 6 34 for this example Figure 6 34 Example Scattered Write Request Unconverted Data File with Entered Parameters i Data File N100 dec SLC 500 Example Scattered Write Response Data In this example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 35 to store the response values tha
158. ble click on the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 4 13 and Figure 4 14 Note that all tag names are defined and Datalinks include the assigned drive parameter name After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 11 Figure 4 13 Controller Input Tags PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 12 Configuring the I O Figure 4 14 Controller Output Tags My PowerFlex 755 Drive AB PowerFlex 3 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogicCommand 2 0000 0000 0000 DINT My PowerFlex 755 Drive O LogcCommand Stop c BOOL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogicCommand Start c BOOL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogcCommand Jogl c BOOL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogicCommand ClearF auts c BOOL My PowerHlex 55 Urive U LogcLommand Fonward c BUUL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogicCommand Reverse c BOOL My FowerHex 55 Dnve U LogcLommand Manual c BUUL My PowerFles 755 Drive D LogieCommand AccelTimel c BOOL My FowerHex 55 Dnve U LogcLommand Accell mez c BUUL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogicC
159. bridge series in Step 3 Electronic Compatible Module The Compatible Module setting for Electronic Keying Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore ensure that you have set the correct revision in this screen Refer to the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings Open When this box is checked additional module properties screens will appear Module to further configure the bridge after clicking OK When unchecked the Properties bridge s New Module screen will close after clicking OK For this example uncheck this box 6 Click OK The bridge is now configured for the EtherNet IP network It appears in the I O Configuration folder In our example a 1756 ENBT bridge appears under the I O Configuration folder Figure 4 6 with its assigned name Figure 4 6 RSLogix 5000 I O Configuration Folder 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 A7 fa 0 1756 163 v16 Example using Embd ENet for PF755 3 8 5 1756 ENBT A My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge xx Ethernet There are two ways to add the adapter into the I O configuration e Add On Drive Profiles RSLogix 5000 version 16 or higher e Generic Profile RSLogix 5000 all versions These are described in the following separate sections If your version of RSLogix 5000 supports Add On Drive Profiles we highly recommend using t
160. c Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable 0 In this example we are reading five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each parameter being read requires four contiguous 16 bit words Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Therefore the Size in Bytes must be set to 40 The data structure format is shown in Figure 6 52 on page 6 43 Maximum message length is 128 words 256 bytes which equates to 32 parameters PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 38 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 Example Scattered Read Request Data In this example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 45 to store the request values to be read from these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive 001 Output Frequency 007 Output Current 008 Output Voltage 009 Output Power and 011 DC Bus
161. cit Messaging 6 33 MicroLogix 1100 Formatting a Message to Read Single Parameter Figure 6 38 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens DER lt MSG MG13 0 1 Elements General MuiHon Send Data Receive Data Ins Aud Hop Ded Remove Hop 10 91 100 79 Thus Controller Channet Communication Command Dala Table Aulthesss Revive 0 0 Size in Bytes Receive 1 Seri NVA Tatact Device Message Timeout 33 Ignore if timed out TO 0 Break Connection BK 0 Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Eno EH 07 Message done IDNJ 1 Message Trarmmiting ST 0 Message Freblesd FN n Local Remote Local MuliHop Yee Fxleridenl Routing lo File ROX RISO fex Service Benea Gel Albae Singe Service Code hex Clace hes Idec Instance heu Idec Attribute hex dec Enor Code Hex 0 Eroe Description No ences The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single read message General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address F40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the response file Size in Bytes 49 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit intege
162. ck to 1 Enabled E mail messaging will always remain active regardless of whether or not its settings are protected unless e mail messaging was never configured For more information about configuring adapter e mail messaging or to stop e mail messages refer to Configure E mail Notification Web Page on page 8 6 Figure 3 18 Edit Web Features HIM Screen Bit Description 0 E mail Cfg Default 1 Enabled 1 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit In Figure 3 18 it equals 1 Enabled Changes to this parameter take effect immediately A reset is not required PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Resetting the Adapter Restoring Adapter Parameters to Factory Defaults Configuring the Adapter 3 17 Changes to switch settings and some adapter parameters require that you reset the adapter before the new settings take effect You can reset the adapter by cycling power to the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder the adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting the adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If Adapter parameters can be restored in two ways e ALL testores ALL adapter parameters to their factory default values e MOST trestores MOST
163. col EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer Explicit Messaging packets using IP TCP guarantees delivery of data through the use of retries UDP User Datagram Protocol EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer I O packets using IP UDP provides a simple but fast capability to send I O messaging packets between devices This protocol ensures that adapters transmit the most recent data because it does not use acknowledgements or retries UDDT User Defined Data Type A structure data type that you define during the development of an application for example to convert 32 bit REAL parameter data to correctly write and read their values Zero Data When communications are disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and drive can respond with zero data Zero data results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command Reference and Datalink data If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will stay running but at zero Reference PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P G 8 Glossary Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P A adapter applying power 2 4 commissioning 2 6 compatible products 1 3 components 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 connecting to the network 2 4 definition G 1 features 1 2 flash updating 3 18 hardware address 7 4 instal
164. configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer 1 In the RSLogix 5000 window select Communications gt Download The Download dialog box Figure 4 15 appears Figure 4 15 Download Dialog Box Download Download nlline project Y16 Example using Embd ENet for PT755 to the controller Connected Controller Name mycontroller Type 1756 L63 A ControlLogix5563 Controller Palh AB ETHIP 1310 31 100 83 NB ackplane NO Serial Number 0027D274 Security No Protection image memory DANGER The controller i stored in nonvolatile might be out of date following the download Failure to update the contents of nonvolatile memory could result in running old logic following a power up of corrupt memory condition ly DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verily these devices drives network devices Jrd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Faize to load proper conhgurahon could result in misalignerd data and unexpected equipment operation coed te PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 13 TIP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 is unable to go online se
165. ctly presents the 32 bit REAL floating point value PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 15 PLC 5 Formatting a Message to Read Single Parameter Figure 6 16 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens i3 MSG MG13 0 2 Elements fe General MidiHop Ins Add Hop From Device From Por ToAddrece Type ToAddiess L 2 EtherNet IP Device etr 10 91 100 79 MSG MG13 0 2 Elements fe Genel MultiHcp This PLC Fordul Bits Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read Ignore if timed ou TO 0 Data I able Address To he ies NR 0 Size in Elements 2 J Awahna Exccubon IE WT u Pot Mumba 2 Cortines Run CN o Emoe EA n Target Device Message done DN U Data Table Address tanta Message Transmitina ISTE U MukHop Yes Message Enabled EN 0 Error Eror LodelHesE U Eroe Description No ens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single read message General Tab Example Value Description Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read Controller type and command type for controller to read data from the drive Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Elements 2 Number of elements
166. d any error codes that are returned PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 12 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Example Scattered Write Request Data In this example we use the data structure in Figure 6 12 in the source tag Scattered Write Request to write new values to these 32 bit REAL floating point parameters PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 571 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz Figure 6 12 shows the parameter values which in this example have been converted using a UDDT to correctly write their values COP Copy instructions could have been used for this purpose instead of a UDDT Figure 6 12 Example Scattered Write Request Converted Data Scallered Write RequesLAccel Time 2 Pa No Scattered Write RequestAccel Time 2 Par Value Scattered Write RequestDecel Tme 2 Par No Scallered Write Request Decel Time 2 Par Value E Scattered_Write_Request Preset Speed 5 P No Scattered Witte Request Preset Speed 5 Par Value Scattered Write Request Preset_ Speed amp Par No Scltered Wire Request Preset Speed 6 Par Value Scattered Wiite Request Preset Speed 7 Par No Scattered Write Request Preset Speed 7 Par Value ControlLogix Example Scattered Write Response Data The results of the message
167. d by the Ethernet hardware 66 Last TCP Reset Last reason that the adapter reset or rejected a TCP IP connection 67 Missed IO Pkts Number of incoming I O connection packets that the adapter did not receive 68 Net Addr Sw The present value of the adapter node address switches PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Viewing and Clearing Events Troubleshooting 7 5 The adapter maintains an event queue that reports the history of its actions You can view the event queue using the enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM DriveExplorer 6 01 or higher software or DriveExecutive 5 01 or higher software For details on viewing and clearing events using the HIM refer to the Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM User Manual publication 20HIM UMO001 Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation If you encounter unexpected communications problems the events may help you or Allen Bradley personnel troubleshoot the problem The following events may appear in the event queue Table 7 B Adapter Events Code Event Description 1 No Event Empty event queue entry 2 Device Power Up The adapter was powered up normally 3 Device Reset The adapter was manually reset 4 EEPROM CRC Error The EEPROM in the adapter is corrupt 5 App Updated The application code in the adapter was updated
168. dapter Web Pages 2 In the Address box type the IP address of the adapter and then press ENTER The adapter web Home Page Figure 8 1 appears Important Clicking the browser s Refresh button always re displays the Home Page even while viewing another adapter web page Figure 8 1 Adapter Web Home Page Example Internet Explorer Rockw Automation D Home D Process display D TCP IP configurati Configure e mail n Gi Browse devices Drive Status Stopped D Online user manu Commanded Direction Forward Software tools We Rotation Direction 1X Launch my DriveE IS Launch my DriveE 0 000 Hz 2 E mail technical s ps Drive Information Revision 1 006 Forward EtherNet IP Embedded Communication IP Address 10 91 100 73 Etherr ss MAC 00 00 BC B1 9C 4F Serial Number 0x00000000 Communication Adapter Status Operational 1 0 Connection Status No connection Copyright amp 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Title Bar on Adapter Web Pages The title bar appears on all adapter web pages including its Home Page It consists of three elements Title Bar Element Description Allen Bradley logo This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the ab com web Home Page at far left Adapter Title middle Shows the adapter type or the title configured by the user via a HIM DriveExecutive or DriveExplorer Rockwell Automation This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the Rockwell Automation
169. ddresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For N File details see N Files on page C 8 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 27 Creating PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG12 n and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG12 0 Then press Enter 2 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG12 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter 3 In the MSG instruction Figure 4 31 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 32 Figure 4 31 PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks MSG o Read Write Mes
170. drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 16 DL From Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 17 DL To Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 18 DL To Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 19 DL To Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 20 DL To Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using the I O 5 9 Adapter Parameter Value Description 21 DL To Net 05 537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 22 DL To Net 06 538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 23 DL To Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 24 DL To Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 25 DL To Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 26 DL To Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 27 DL To Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 28 DL To Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 29 DL To Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 30 DL To Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 31 DL To Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 32 DL To Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 TIP The DL From Net xx parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs
171. ds which equates to 32 parameters SLC 500 Example Scattered Read Request Data In this example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 29 to store the request values to be read from these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive 001 Output Frequency 007 Output Current 008 Output Voltage 009 Output Power and 011 DC Bus Volts PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 25 Figure 6 29 Example Scattered Read Request Data File Data l ile N70 dec E Radix Decimal Columns fo y SLC 500 Example Scattered Read Response Data In this example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 30 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters These values have been converted using a CPW Copy Word instruction for correct presentation Figure 6 30 Example Scattered Read Response Data File Data Mile 104 In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Address Read Value 1 Output Frequency F104 0 60 42523 Hz 7 Output Current F104 1 2 391804 Amp 8 Output Voltage F104 2 208 921 VAC 9 Output Power F104 3 0 2091006 kW 11 DC Bus Voltage F104 4 283 1714 VDC SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters A Custom scattered
172. ds correctly to various situations for example a controller in idle state Peer Fit Action Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that Peer I O communications have been disrupted This setting is effective only if I O is transmitted through the adapter A Default Values Type Reset Required 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Read Write No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 56 Peer Fit Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if the adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P B 6 Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description 57 58 59 Msg Fit Action Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that explicit messaging only when used for drive control via PCCC and the CIP Register Object has been disrupted Details Defau
173. dule transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the network The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner The data is stored in the scanner buffer The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner s buffer upload The Explicit Message is complete Note The scanner module may be integrated with the controller for example ControlLogix 9000 For information on the maximum number of Explicit Messages that can be executed at a time refer to the user manual for the bridge or scanner and or controller that is being used PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P ControlLogix Example gt Using Explicit Messaging 6 3 TIP To display the Message Configuration screen in RSLogix 5000 add a message instruction MSG create a new tag for the message Properties Base tag type MESSAGE data type controller scope and click the button in the message instruction For supported classes instances and attributes refer to Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Single Parameter A Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 007 Output Current in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Table 6 A Example Controller Tags for Read S
174. e 192 168 1 xxx that has other products with switches to set their IP addresses does not need to be accessed from outside the network and you prefer a simplified node addressing method The three adapter switches are read when the drive powers up and represent three decimal digits from top to bottom see Figure 2 1 If set to a valid address 001 254 the adapter will use that value as the lower octet of its IP address 192 168 1 xxx where xxx rotary switch settings along with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 and there will be no gateway configured Also the setting for adapter Parameter 36 BOOTP is automatically ignored See Figure 2 1 and its accompanying table for all possible switch settings and their related descriptions Important When using the adapter rotary switches set the IP address before power is applied because the adapter uses the IP address it detects when it first receives power BOOTP Server Use BOOTP if you prefer to control the IP addresses of devices using a server The IP address subnet mask and gateway addresses will then be provided by the BOOTP server Adapter Parameters Use adapter parameters when you want more flexibility in setting up the IP address or need to communicate outside the control network using a gateway The IP address subnet mask and gateway addresses will then come from the adapter parameters you set Important Regardless of the method used to set the adapter s IP add
175. e configured I O Topic Page About I O Messaging 5 1 Understanding the I O Image 5 2 Using Logic Command Status 5 4 Using Reference Feedback 5 4 Using Datalinks 5 5 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 5 6 ControlLogix Example 5 6 PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Example 5 14 The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists On CIP based networks including EtherNet IP I O connections are used to transfer the data which controls the PowerFlex drive and sets its Reference I O can also be used to transfer data to and from Datalinks in PowerFlex 755 drives The adapter includes the Logic Command Logic Status Reference Feedback and memory allocation for the Generic Ethernet module profile all as 32 bit words in the controller s I O image This basic I O must always be configured in the EtherNet bridge using RSLogix Additional I O if needed can be set using up to 16 Datalinks to write data and or up to 16 Datalinks to read data When using any combination of these Datalinks add one 32 bit word for each Datalink to the basic I O Input Size and or Output Size Chapt
176. e 2 Par 536 11 Use Present Time Decel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 Par 537 10 Use Decel Time 2 Par 538 11 Use Present Time X Ref Select 1 000 No Command X Ref Select 2 001 Ref A Select Par 545 X Ref Select 3 010 Ref B Select Par 550 011 Preset 3 Par 573 100 Preset 4 Par 574 101 Preset 5 Par 575 110 Preset 6 Par 576 111 Preset 7 Par 577 X Reserved x Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop 1 Coast to Stop x Current Limit Stop 0 Not Current Limit Stop 1 Current Limit Stop x Run 0 Not Run 1 Run x Jog 2 2 0 Not Jog 2 Par 557 1 Jog2 x Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X Reserved x Reserved x Reserved x Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X Reserved x Reserved X Reserved 0 ANo Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive 9 ANo Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Jog 1 Jog 2 condition will jog the drive A transition to a 0 will stop the drive 3 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 A No Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Run condition will run the drive A transition to a 0 will stop the drive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P D 2 Logic Command Status Words for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Logic Status Word
177. e 4 33 In our example we will configure a SLC 500 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 32 Datalinks 16 to read 16 to write over the network Figure 4 33 SLC 500 Example EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 SLC 500 Controller with Embedded Ethernet IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 755 Drive with Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter OOOO sae Computer with Ethernet Connection Configuring Parameters for Network I O Since the I O for the drive is message based there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 500 v7 or higher project until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 we need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks Since the adapter always uses the 32 bit Logic Status and 32 bit Feedback at least two 32 bit words must be accounted for in the controller input image The adapter also uses the 32 bit Logic Command and 32 bit Reference requiring at least two 32 bit words that must be accounted for in the controller output image If any or all of the drive s sixteen 32 bit Datalinks are used see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy on page 3 8 or Custom Peer I O Configuration on page 3 11 e An additional 32 bit word for each DL From
178. e Pe Instance o Hex Class u3 Hox Atuibuter o Hex Souice Lenglh Destination f xj we Scattered Vile e v New Tag Enable Q Enable Wattng Eror Cot Start Extended Eror Code Error Path Ene Text Q Donc Done Length 0 Timed Out The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a multiple write message Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4e Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Scattered Write Request 9 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 40 bytes 3 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered_Write_Response The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 2 My_PowerFlex_755_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from th
179. e Service Type pull down menu When selecting a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable When writing to 32 bit REAL floating point parameters as in this example data conversion using COP Copy instructions or UDDT s is required to correctly write the parameter values BS My_PowerFlex_755_Drive E Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder for this example In this example we are writing to five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each parameter being written to requires two contiguous DINT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to the name of the UDDT of five interleaved DINTs and REALs Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 40 bytes for an array of five scattered read structures Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum message length is 256 bytes which can write up to 32 parameters regardless of their size The controller tag for Scattered Write Response must be the same size as the controller tag for Scattered_Write_Request for this example 40 bytes An array of DINTs is suggested to be able to rea
180. e controller is idle e Parameter 56 Peer Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and Peer I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 57 Msg Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg Sets the number of network to drive Datalinks parameters that are used for peer I O The Datalinks being used are allocated from the end of the list For example if this parameter s value is set to 3 Datalinks 14 16 are allocated for the 3 selected Datalinks The Datalinks allocated for peer I O cannot overlap with other assigned DL From Net 01 16 parameters 77 DLs Fr Peer Act Displays the value of Parameter 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg at the time the drive was reset This is the number of actual peer to drive Datalinks that the drive is expecting 78 Logic Src Cfg Controls which of the peer to drive Datalinks contain the Logic Command for the drive 79 Ref Src Cfg Controls which of the peer to drive Datalinks contain the Reference for the drive Adapter Parameters Details Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required B 7 Cc O
181. e pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable e Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to 10 will write the parameter value to temporary memory so the parameter value will be lost after the drive is power cycled It is recommended to use the 10 setting when frequent write messages are required 3 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter Therefore set the Data Table Address to F type floating point If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit integer the Data Table Address type would be set to L long word 4 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter If the parameter being written to is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 36 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this example we use the data table address in Figure 6 42 to
182. eatures The features of the embedded EtherNet IP adapter include Switches to set an IP address before applying power to the drive or you can disable the switches and use a BOOTP server or adapter parameters to configure the IP address Compatibility with various configuration tools to configure the embedded EtherNet IP adapter and host drive The tools include the enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Human Interface Module on the drive and drive configuration software such as DriveExplorer version 6 01 or higher or DriveExecutive version 5 01 or higher Status indicators that report the status of the embedded EtherNet IP adapter and network communications They are visible when the drive cover is open or closed Parameter configurable 32 bit Datalinks in the I O to meet application requirements 16 for writing data from the network and 16 for reading data to the network Explicit Messaging support Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy that can be configured to transmit data to and from either a controller or another PowerFlex 750 Series drive on the network User defined fault actions to determine how the embedded EtherNet IP adapter and its host PowerFlex 755 drive respond to I O messaging communication disruptions Comm FIt Action Controllers in idle mode Idle Flt Action Peer device communication disruptions Peer Flt Action Explicit messaging disruptions for drive control via PCCC and the CIP Regi
183. ec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable n this example Output Current is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Words would be set to 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 20 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this example we use the data table address in Figure 6 23 to store the response value 1 771247 amps that was read from drive parameter 007 Output Current Figure 6 23 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File Data File 102 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Single Parameter A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 535 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Figure 6 24 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Write Single
184. ed adapter to scanner read only 37 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 38 Masked Logic Command read write 39 Logic Status data read only 40 Logic Command data read write 41 Feedback data read only 42 Reference data read write 1 The mask command DWORD is set to the value of the first DWORD of the data where there are ones in the second DWORD of the data Only the bits of the Logic Command that have the corresponding mask bit set are applied Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Description 1 Read Revision 2 Read Maximum Instance 3 Read Number of Instances 100 Read Write Timeout PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 5 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Bad Flag BOOL If set to 1 then attribute 4 may contain invalid data 0 good 1 bad 2 Get Direction BOOL Direction of data transfer 0 Producer Register drive to network 1 Consumer Register network to drive 3 Get Size UINT Size of register data in bits 4 Conditional Data ARRAY of BITS __ Data to be transferred 1 The access rule of Set is optional if attribute 2 Direction 1 If Direction 0 the access rule is Get PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 6 EtherNet IP Objects PCCC Object
185. ed out and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung Data Table Address N20 0 An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written Size in Elements 1 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Channel 1 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout This setting is unavailable grayed out Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 N42 3 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow Ethernet messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 Configuring the I O 4 33 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For details on setting the control timeout value and its function see N Files on page C 8 Creating SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datali
186. efer to the EtherNet IP specification for more information about EtherNet IP objects Information about the EtherNet IP specification is available on the ODVA web site http www odva org Supported Data Types Data Type Description BOOL 8 bit value low bit is true or false BOOL x Array of n bits CONTAINER 32 bit parameter value sign extended if necessary DINT 32 bit signed integer INT 16 bit signed integer LWORD 64 bit unsigned integer REAL 32 bit floating point SHORT STRING Struct of USINT length indicator L USINT L characters SINT 8 bit signed integer STRINGN Struct of UINT character length indicator W UINT length indicator L USINT W x L string data STRING x Array of n characters STRUCT Structure name only no size in addition to elements TCHAR 8 or 16 bit character UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer USINT 8 bit unsigned integer PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 2 EtherNet IP Objects Identity Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x01 1 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x05 No Yes Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x01 Yes Yes Get Attributes All Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device connected to the adapter This number of components can
187. emory might be out of date following the download Failure to update the contents of nonvolatile memory could result in running old logic following a power up or corrupt memory condition A DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verify these devices drives network devices 3rd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation Cancel Help TIP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 is unable to go online select Communications Who Active to try to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver in RSLinx See Using RSLinx Classic on page 4 1 for details Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 goes into the Online mode and the I O OK box in the upper left of the screen should be solid green Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears Navigate to a folder type a file name and click Save to save the configuration to a file
188. end Data Receive Data Tha Controller Target Device Servee nan Sere Code best 2E Class hex 33 Inetance hex Attribute hex Enor Descipbon No emos Channel T Size in Words Receive Dara 20 Send Dare 20 Data Table Aden Meceive Datat Send Deter N1000 From Pot To Address Type To Address 1 EtheiNeUAP Dewce st 10 91 10 79 Message Corisol Bits Igwe i timed cot TOF 0 Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Continuous Aun CO n Enc ER 0 Done ION 0 Message Timeout xt sec 73 Transmiting ST 6 MuHop res Enabled EN 0 Waiting for Queus Space 0 3 dec 147 o dec e T Eno deck 0 Enor Code hes Q The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a multiple write message General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words Each word size is a 16 bit integer Receive Data 20 Number of words to be received Send Data 20 9 Number of words to be sent Data Table Address An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction Receive Data N90 0 This address is the starting word of the response file Send Data N100 0 This address is the starting word of the request file Service Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4E Hex 9 Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages
189. ents beginning at N150 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 read ten elements beginning at N150 4 Number of parameters in the drive Drive parameters 1 124 Drive parameters 125 249 Drive parameters 250 374 Drive parameters 375 499 N150 0 1 N150 2 249 N151 0 249 N152 0 249 N153 0 249 N199 0 249 Drive parameters 6125 6249 N201 N212 These N files let you read and write parameter values in DPI Peripherals for example a HIM or adapter as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For example to read parameter 1 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 1 read two elements beginning at N201 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 5 the adapter read ten elements beginning at N209 4 N201 0 1 N201 2 249 N202 0 249 N203 0 1 N203 2 249 N204 0 249 N205 0 1 N205 2 249 N206 0 249 N207 0 1 N207 2 249 N208 0 249 N209 0 1 N209 2 249 N210 0 249 N211 0 1 N211 2 249 N212 0 249 N213 0 1 N213 2 249 N214 0 249 N215 0 1 N215 2 249 N216 0 249 N217 0 1 N217 2 249 N218 0 249 N219 0 1 N219 2 249 N220 0 249 N221 0 1 N221 2 249 N222 0 249 N223 0 1 N223 2 249 N224 0 249 N225 0 1 N225 2 2
190. er B 3 PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class drives compatible with adapter 1 3 definition G 6 HIM 3 1 preparing for an installation 2 1 processor see controller programmable logic controller see controller Q quick start 1 5 R Ref Src Cfg parameter B 7 Reference Feedback definition G 6 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 controllers 5 3 using 5 4 Register object C 4 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Index 4 regulatory compliance A 1 related documentation P 1 requested packet interval 4 9 4 17 resetting the adapter 3 17 RSLinx Classic documentation P 1 using 4 1 RSLogix 5 500 5000 G 6 S safety precautions 1 4 scanner G 6 SLC 500 configuring the I O 4 29 explicit messaging 6 18 limitations when using the I O 4 20 using the I O 5 14 specifications adapter A 1 EtherNet IP address G 2 EtherNet IP subnet mask G 6 status indicators definition G 6 ENET 1 6 7 2 LINK 1 6 7 2 locating 1 6 normal operation 2 5 troubleshooting with 7 2 understanding 7 1 Subnet Cfg 1 4 parameters B 3 subnet mask definition G 6 setting with BOOTP 3 2 setting with parameters 3 5 switches G 7 T TCP Transmission Control Protocol G 7 TCP IP Interface object C 34 technical support P 2 To Peer Enable parameter B 9 To Peer Period parameter B 9 To Peer
191. er 3 Configuring the Adapter and Chapter 4 Configuring the I O discuss how to configure the adapter and controller on the network for the required I O The Glossary defines the different options This chapter discusses how to use I O after you have configured the adapter and controller PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 5 2 Using the I O Understanding the I O Image The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of view Therefore output I O is data that is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input I O is status data that is produced by the adapter and consumed as input by the controller The I O image will vary based on e How many of the drive s 32 bit Datalinks DL From Net 01 16 and DL To Net 01 16 are used e ControlLogix Controllers only Specific drive profile used in RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profile in v16 or higher or Generic Profile in all versions of RSLogix 5000 ControlLogix Controller Image Since the Add On Drive Profile in RSLogix 5000 v16 or higher provides descriptive controller tags the I O image tag size and location is automatically configured based on the drive being used When using the Generic Profile in RSLogix 5000 however controller tags are not descriptive or defined Table 5 A shows the I O image when using all of the 32 bit Datalinks Table 5 A ControlLogix I O Image for Po
192. es on page 5 14 3 For N File details see N Files on page C 8 gt TIP If the controller is controlling more than one drive it is recommended to intersperse the control I O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time That is sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P MicroLogix 1100 Example Configuring the I O 4 37 Example Network After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 4 41 In our example we will configure a MicroLogix 1100 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 32 Datalinks 16 to read 16 to write over the network Figure 4 41 MicroLogix 1100 Example EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 MicroLogix 1100 Controller IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 755 Drive with Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter SS Computer with Rc j Ethernet Connection Configuring Parameters for Network I O Since the I O for the drive is message b
193. eset Speed 3 13 DL From Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 14 DL From Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 15 DL From Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 16 DL From Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 17 DL To Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 18 DL To Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 19 DL To Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 20 DL To Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 21 DL To Net 05 537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 22 DL To Net 06 538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 23 DL To Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 24 DL To Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 25 DL To Net 09 557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 26 DL To Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 27 DL To Net 11 572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 28 DL To Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 29 DL To Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 30 DL To Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 31 DL To Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 32 DL To Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 TIP The DL From Net xx parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for examp
194. et IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 43 MicroLogix 1100 Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 6 52 use 32 bit words and can accommodate up to 32 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with Bit 15 set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code Figure 6 52 Data Structures for Scattered Read Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number LSW Word 0 Parameter Number LSW 1 Parameter Number MSW 2 Parameter Value LSW 3 Parameter Value MSW 4 Parameter Number LSW 5 Parameter Number MSW 6 Parameter Value LSW 7 Parameter Value MSW 8 Parameter Number LSW 9 Parameter Number MSW 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number LSW 13 Parameter Number MSW 14 Parameter Value LSW 15 Parameter Value MSW 16 Parameter Number LSW 17 Parameter Number MSW 18 Parameter Value LSW 19 Parameter Value MSW 20 Parameter Number LSW 21 Parameter Number MSW 22 Parameter Value LSW 23 Parameter Value MSW 24 Parameter Number LSW 25 Parameter Number MSW 26 Parameter Value LSW 27 Parameter Value
195. for example data to write to a drive parameter The DL To Net xx parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Controller Tags When you add the adapter and drive to the I O configuration Chapter 4 RSLogix 5000 automatically creates generic non descriptive controller tags In this example program the following controller tags are used Figure 5 4 ControlLogix Controller Tags for Generic Drive Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp Value Data Type Description E My_PowerFlex_755_Drive C AB ETHERNET I My PowerFlex 755 Drive l AB ETHERNET My PowerFlex 755 Drive AB ETHERNET You can expand the Output and Input tags to reveal the output and input configuration The Input tag for this example requires nineteen 32 bit words of data see Figure 5 5 The Output tag for this example program requires eighteen 32 bit words of data see Figure 5 6 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 5 10 Using the I O PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Figure 5 5 ControlLogix Input Image for Generic Drive Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name Data Type E My PowerFlex 755 Drive l My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data AB ETHERNET DINTA My_PowerFlex_755_Drive l Data 0
196. g connection to the adapter e Configure the adapter for the program in the controller or the I O from the peer device Solid Green LINK Status Indicator Status Off The adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network Cause The adapter is not powered or is not transmitting on the network No action required Corrective Actions If ENET indicator is off Apply power to the drive e Securely connect the adapter to the network using an Ethernet cable Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector e Setaunique IP address using the adapter switches a BOOTP server or by disabling BOOTP and using adapter parameters If ENET indicator is solid red e Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power If ENET indicator is flashing red green or red e Check the IP address in the adapter and scanner and verify that the controller can communicate with the adapter e Ping the adapter Normal condition if the adapter is idle Flashing Green The adapter is transmitting on the network No action required Solid Green The adapter is ready to communicate PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P No action required Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items Troubleshooting 7 3 If you encounter unexpected communications problems the adapter s diagnostic items may help y
197. gned to adapter Parameter 02 DL From Net 02 MSW N20 45 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 03 DL From Net 03 LSW N20 46 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 03 DL From Net 03 MSW N20 47 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 04 DL From Net 04 LSW N20 48 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 04 DL From Net 04 MSW N20 49 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 05 DL From Net 05 LSW N20 50 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 05 DL From Net 05 MSW PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 5 16 Using the I O Table 5 D PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Continued Data Table Address N20 51 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 06 DL From Net 06 LSW Description N20 52 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 06 DL From Net 06 MSW N20 53 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 07 DL From Net 07 LSW N20 54 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 07 DL From Net 07 MSW N20 55 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 08 DL From Net 08 LSW N20 56 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 08 DL From Net 08 MSW N20 57 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 09 DL From Net 09 LSW
198. guring the I O General Tab Box This Controller Figure 4 38 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datalinks t MSG Rung 2 2 N11 0 Del Remove Hop From Port To Address Type To Address Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 31 100 79 MSG Rung 2 2 N11 0 General Mutton This Controller Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address To be retried NR 0 Size in Flements Awang Execution EW u Channel Continuous Run CN v Enor ER fu Target Device Message done DN o Messave Timeout 5 0 Message Transmitina STE 0 Dala Table Akker Message Enabled EN 0 Wailing fur Queue Space 0 Local Remote MuliHop Error Fror Code Hexy N Fror Description No errore Setting Communication Command This setting is unavailable grayed out and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung Data Table Address N20 1 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive Size in Elements 36 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Channel 1 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout This setting is unavailable grayed out Message timeout duration in second
199. h your application before applying power to the drive Install the drive cover and apply power to the drive The embedded EtherNet IP adapter receives its power from the drive When you apply power to the embedded EtherNet IP adapter for the first time its ENET status indicator should be solid or flashing green after an initialization If it is red there is a problem Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Item Name STS Status Installing the Adapter 2 5 Start Up Status Indications After power has been applied status indicators for the PowerFlex 755 drive and embedded EtherNet IP adapter can be viewed on the front of the drive Figure 2 3 Possible start up status indications are shown in Table 2 A Figure 2 3 Drive and Adapter Status Indicators i fa UY if Table 2 A Drive and Adapter Start Up Status Indications Color State Description Drive STS Indicator Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing When running a type 2 non configurable alarm condition exists drive continues to run When stopped a start inhibit condition exists and the drive cannot be started see drive parameter 933 Start Inhibit Steady A type 1
200. has to be executed first before the Logic Command Reference and DL to Net Datalink messages will work For more information on N42 3 and N45 target device data table addresses refer to N Files on page C 8 Selecting the Controller 1 Start RSLogix 5 The RSLogix 5 window appears Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Figure 4 26 Figure 4 26 PLC 5 Select Processor Type Screen Select Processor Type Processor Name DX amp MPLC Platform Processor Series Memory pm Ethemet y PLC5 40E x E 2000 Files xtended Forci v 49152 x Revision D e Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernet Who Active 10 Sec 2 Assign a name for the processor From the pull down fields select the appropriate choices to match your PLC 5 controller and application and click OK The RSLogix 5 project window appears Creating PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout 1 In the RSLogix 5 project window treeview under Program Files double click on LAD 2 2 Insert a ladder rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG10 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG10 0 Then press Enter 3 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n
201. he CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units Refer to Formulas for Converting on page C 33 9 Do NOT continually write parameter data to NVS Refer to the attention on page 6 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 31 Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 INS ee ZEN LL 010 USINT bit integer gt 011 UINT 16 bit integer 100 UDINT 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not Unicode or 16 bits Unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 unsigned 1 signed 4 Hidden 0 visible 1 hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 May be the sink end of a link 1 May not be the sink end of a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled e g drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENU
202. he Ethernet driver Note that two other RSLinx drivers Ethernet devices or Remote Devices via Linx Gateway may be used Use one of these drivers if the EtherNet IP Driver cannot see your drive Example Network After the adapter is configured the drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 4 2 In our example we will configure a 1756 ENBT Series A bridge to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 32 Datalinks 16 to read 16 to write over the network Figure 4 2 Example ControlLogix EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 ControlLogix Controller with 1756 ENBT Bridge IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 755 Drive with Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter Computer with Ethernet Connection Adding the Bridge to the I O Configuration To establish communications between the controller and adapter over the network you must first add the ControlLogix controller and its bridge to the I O configuration 1 Start RSLogix 5000 The RSLogix 5000 window appears Select File gt New to display the New Controller screen Figure 4 3 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded Et
203. he I O General Tab Box Figure 4 48 MicroLogix 1100 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks F MSG MG12 0 1 Elements Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hon To Address 10 91 100 79 DoR From Poet Channel To Address Type From Device P EtherNet IP Device su This MictoLogix F MSG MG12 0 1 Elements Control Bits Ignore d med ox TO 0 Break Connection BK 0 Awaiting Execution Fwy 1 This Controller Channel 1 Integral Communication Command nnncPri write Data Table Address N2037 Size in Elements 36 Ena ER n Message done DN o Message ransmutting S I J v Message Enabled EN n Tagel Device Message Timeout 33 Data Table Addess Naan Local Remote MultiHop Routing Information Fill Fin Error Codelllex 0 Error Description No errors Setting This Controller data for MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Write The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Since the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Write command type was selected to write data to the drive Data Table Address N20 37 An unused controller data table address containing t
204. he data to be written to the drive Size in Elements 36 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 N45 0 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 2 An unused routing information file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For N File details see N Files on page C 8 gt TIP Ifthe controller is controlling more than one drive it is recommended to intersperse the control I O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time That is sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Chapter 5 About I O Messaging Using the I O This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to control configure and monitor a PowerFlex 755 drive using th
205. he device and transmits it to the network The embedded EtherNet IP adapter connects PowerFlex 750 Series drives to an EtherNet IP network Adapters are sometimes also called cards embedded communication options gateways modules and peripherals BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP lets the adapter configure itself dynamically at boot time if the network has a BOOTP server The BOOTP server assigns the adapter a preconfigured IP address a subnet mask and a gateway address therefore you do not have to configure these using the parameters in the adapter BOOTP can make it easier to administer an Ethernet network A free version of Rockwell Software s BOOTP Server can be accessed at http www ab com networks Bridge A network device that can route messages from one network to another A bridge also refers to a communications module in a ControlLogix controller that connects the controller to a network See also Scanner CIP Common Industrial Protocol CIP is the transport and application layer protocol used for messaging over EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet networks The protocol is used for implicit messaging real time I O and explicit messaging configuration data collection and diagnostics ControlFLASH An Allen Bradley software tool that lets users electronically update firmware on printed circuit boards The tool takes advantage of the growing use of flash memory electronic era
206. herNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 3 4 Configuring the I O 4 3 Figure 4 3 New Controller Screen RSLogix 5000 v16 shown New Controller Alien Bradley 1756 162 ConttolLogs5563 Controller 16 Md Redundancy Enabled Name v16 Example using Embd ENet for PF755 Description Example showing how to control a PowerFlex 755 drive with Rs embedded Ethe NetAP adapter using RSLogix 5000 v16 suflware Chassis Type 175 amp A7 7 Slot ControlLogix Chassis Y Slot v Create In C RSLogix 5000 Projects Browse Select the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application Then click OK The RSLogix 5000 window reappears with the treeview in the left pane In the treeview right click the I O Configuration folder and select New Module The Select Module screen appears Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules Figure 4 4 Figure 4 4 Bridge Select Module Screen Wi Select Module Vendor 1756 DHRTOJC 1756 DH Bridge RTO Scanner Allen hradiey 1756 DHRIO D 1756 DH Dridge RIO Scanner Allen Dradley 1756 DNB 1756 DeviceNet Scanner Allen Bradley 1 55 ENZ1 A 1 56 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Endge Twested Par Media Allen Bradley 1756 ENBT A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisled Pair Media Allen Bradley 1756 ENET A 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface Allen Bradley 1756 ENET B 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface
207. his method PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 5 Using RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profiles v16 or Higher When compared to using the Generic Profile all versions the RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profiles provide these advantages e Profiles for specific drives that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback and Datalinks Additionally Datalinks automatically take the name of the drive parameter to which they are assigned These profiles virtually eliminate I O mismatch errors and substantially reduce drive configuration time New Drive tab eliminates the need for a separate drive software configuration tool e Drive configuration settings are saved as part of the RSLogix 5000 v16 project file ACD and also downloaded to the controller Adding the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge 1 In the treeview right click on the bridge and select New Module to display the Select Module screen In our example we right click on the 1756 ENBT A bridge Expand the Drives group to display all of the available drives with their communication adapters Figure 4 7 Drive Select Module Screen Wil Select Module Deecription Powerflex 7005 2 200V Powerflex 7005 Ph
208. ice 2 Set Language Code USINT 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 10 Korean PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 11 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 3 Get Product Series USINT 1 A 2 B 4 Get Number of Components USINT Number of components e g main control board I O boards in the device 5 Set User Definable Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device with a user supplied name 6 Get Status Text STRING 12 Text describing the status of the device 7 Get Configuration Code USINT Identification of variations 8 Get Configuration Text STRING 16 Text identifying a variation of a family device 9 Get Brand Code UINT 0x0001 Allen Bradley 11 Get NVS Checksum UINT Checksum of the Non Volatile Storage in a device 12 Get Class Revision UINT 2 DPI 13 Get Character Set Code USINT 0 SCANport HIM 1 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 3 ISO 8859 3 Latin 3 4 ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic 6 ISO 8859 6 Arabic 7 ISO 8859 7 Greek 8 ISO 8859 8 Hebrew 9 ISO 8859 9 Turkish 10 ISO 8859 10 Nordic 255 ISO 10646 Unicode 14 Get Product Option Support BOOL 64 15 Get
209. iguration Web Page I Rockwell Automation Microsoft Internet Explorer Expand Minimize D Home 2 Process display I TCP IP configurati IP Address Configure e mail n Subnet Mask Gi Browse devices D Online user manui D Software tools We TS Launch my DriveE s Launch my DriveE 23 E mail technical s BOOTP Gateway Address Ethemet Address MAC Ethernet Received Packets 302 Ethernet Receive Err ted Packets 83 Rockwell Automation 10 91 100 73 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 00 00 BC B1 9C 4F s 0 Copyright 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Information Description IP Address IP address of the adapter Subnet Mask Subnet mask for the adapter s network Gateway Address Address for the gateway device on the adapter s network BOOTP Whether BOOTP is being used to configure the adapter s network information Ethernet Address MAC Hardware address for the adapter Ethernet Received Packets Number of packets that the adapter has received Ethernet Receive Errors Number of receive errors reported by the hardware Ethernet Transmitted Packets Number of packets that the adapter has sent Ethernet Transmit Errors Number of transmit errors reported by the hardware EtherNet IP Missed I O Packets Number of I O connection packets that the adapter did not receive PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Pub
210. ingle Parameter Messaging Program Operand Controller Tags for Read Single Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Read Message BOOL MSG Single Read Message MESSAGE Figure 6 2 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Read Single Execute_Single_Read_Message MSG J F Message END Message Control Single_Read_Message CDN gt CER PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 4 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Read Single Parameter Figure 6 3 Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Singic_Read_Message Message Configuration Single Read Messagc Carfigureticn Communication Tag Path My Power Pes 755 Drive Browse Message Configuration Single Read Messagc Configuration Communication Tag Message Type EP Ganese E Source Elemeri Somo Lergh bP zi Byles Er Cede le MHo Clasx u He hp atination fpa fum v Instance 7 Attibute s Hex ES Service ie atinhute Single 5 Type meds Enable Q Enable Wattng Q Stat Q Donc Done Length 0 Eror Code Extended Eror Code Timed Out Error Path Ero Text The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single read message Configuration
211. integer based and the Reference and Feedback are floating point a COP Copy instruction or UDDT is required to correctly write values to the Reference and read values from the Feedback See the ladder logic program examples in Figure 5 8 and Figure 5 9 TIP When using the drive specific add on profile the controller tags for Reference and Feedback are automatically and properly formatted This eliminates the need for data conversion using COP copy instructions or a UDDT PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Datalinks Using the I O 5 5 Table 5 C Example Speed Reference Feedback Scaling for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Network Speed Command Network Reference Value Value Output Speed Feedback Value 130 0 130 Hz 60 Hz 60 0 65 0 65 Hz 60 Hz 9 60 0 32 5 32 5 Hz 32 5 Hz 32 5 0 0 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 0 32 5 1 32 5 Hz 32 5 Hz 32 5 1 The effects of values less than 0 0 depend on whether the PowerFlex 755 drive uses a bipolar or unipolar direction mode Refer to the drive User Manual for details The drive runs at 60 Hz instead of 130 Hz or 65 Hz because drive Parameter 520 Max Fwd Speed sets 60 Hz as the maximum speed A Datalink is a mechanism used by PowerFlex drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow a drive parameter value to be changed without using an Explicit Message When enabled each Datalink occupies one
212. is controlled by the connection size in the controller See the respective controller example sections in Chapter 4 for more information on setting the connection sizes Important Always use the Datalink parameters in consecutive numerical order starting with the first parameter For example use Parameters 17 18 19 20 and 21 to configure 5 Datalinks to read data Otherwise the network I O connection will be larger than necessary which needlessly increases controller response time and memory usage TIP When using a ControlLogix controller and an RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profile v16 or higher there is no need to configure Datalink parameters at this time They will be assigned when configuring the RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profile see Adding the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration on page 4 5 When using a ControlLogix controller and the Generic Profile or a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controller configure the Datalink parameters now as described in this section PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 3 10 Configuring the Adapter Parameters 17 DL To Net 01 through 32 DL To Net 16 control which parameters in the drive adapter or any other connected peripheral send the values to the network The enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive provide user friendly screens to help select the drive or peripheral by port number and
213. itable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Bits 20 and 22 must also be set Bit 26 Name EtherNet IP Objects C 33 Description Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot be written if the I O data being exchanged between the Host and the peripheral is valid 27 Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If
214. ive documentation to determine the size of the parameter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 7 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters A Scattered Read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive 001 Output Frequency 007 Output Current 008 Output Voltage 009 Output Power and 011 DC Bus Volts Table 6 C Example Controller Tags for Read Multiple Parameter Messaging Program Operand Controller Tags for Read Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Read Message BOOL MSG Scattered Read Message MESSAGE Figure 6 6 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Read Multiple Lxecute Scattered Read Message MSG JE Message E Message Control Scattered Read Message C DN2 CFRS PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 8 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Figure 6 7 Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Scattered Read Measagc Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Configuration Communica
215. l Tab Example Value Description Size in Words Each word size is a 16 bit integer Receive Data 20 2 Number of words to be received Send Data 20 Number of words to be sent Data Table Address An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction Receive Data N60 0 This address is the starting word of the response file Send Data N70 0 This address is the starting word of the request file Service Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4D Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable 0 n this example we are reading five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each parameter being read requires four contiguous 16 bit words Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual Size The data structure format is shown in Figure 6 36 on page 6 31 Maximum length is 128 wor
216. l message when an alarm on the drive is deared O Send an e mail message when the Powerflex 755 takes its communication fault action O Send an e mail mes when the Powerflex 755 takes its idle fault action IP address of mail SMTP server 0 E mail addresses Subject of e mail message 50 char max Save Changes Copyright 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Configuring E mail Notification 1 Click the desired DPI host check boxes corresponding to what you want to occur that will send e mail notification Ifyou only want e mail notification when specific faults or alarms occur click this radio button and enter the fault or alarm numbers in the box Ifyou only want e mail notification when all faults or alarms except specific faults or alarms occur click this radio button and enter the fault or alarm numbers in the box 2 Click the communication fault and or idle fault check box if you want e mail notification when these faults occur PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 8 7 3 Enter the following information in their respective boxes Information Description IP address of Type in the address of the mail server that will be used to deliver the e mail messages When the IP address is unknown read the TIP shown below this table to determine the mail server address E mail addre
217. lation 2 1 to 2 6 IP address 3 2 3 5 parameters B 2 to B 9 resetting 3 17 restoring parameters to factory default values 3 17 specifications A 1 viewing its status 3 18 web pages 8 1 to 8 11 applying power to the adapter 2 4 Assembly object C 3 attentions 1 4 baud rate see data rate bit definitions of Logic Command Status word for PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 1 BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol definition G 1 disabling 3 5 free server application G 1 using 3 2 BOOTP parameter B 3 bridge G 1 C cable Ethernet 2 4 CIP Common Industrial Protocol G 1 classes of IP addresses G 4 Comm Fit Action parameter B 5 commissioning the adapter 2 6 communications module see adapter compatible products 1 3 components of the adapter 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 connecting adapter to the network 2 4 ControlFLASH G 1 controller G 1 Index ControlLogix configuring the I O 4 2 explicit messaging 6 3 using the I O 5 6 D data rate definition G 2 setting 3 7 Datalinks parameters DL From Net 01 16 and DL To Net 01 16 definition G 2 in I O image 5 2 using 5 5 diagnostic items 7 3 DL From Net 01 16 parameters B 2 DL To Net 01 16 parameters B 2 DLs Fr Peer Act parameter B 7 DLs Fr Peer Cfg parameter B 7 DLs From Net Act parameter B 3 DLs To Net Act parameter B 3 DLs To Peer Act parameter B 9 DLs To Peer Cfg parameter B 9 DPI Alarm object C 21 DPI Device object C 10 DPI Diagnostic
218. le data to write to a drive parameter The DL To Net xx parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Creating RSLogix 500 v7 or higher Project To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Note that three messages need to be configured The timeout PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 31 message has to be executed first before the Logic Command Reference and DL to Net Datalink messages will work For more information on N42 3 and N45 target device data table addresses refer to N Files on page C 8 Selecting the Controller 1 Start RSLogix 500 The RSLogix 500 window appears Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Figure 4 34 Figure 4 34 SLC 500 Select Processor Type Screen Select Processor Type Processor Name DXAMPLE 1747 LSS3C 5705 CPU 64K Mem 0S501 Series C FRN 1747 L552C 5 05 CPU 32K Mem Series C FRN later 5705 CPU 16K Mem Series C FRN later 5705 CPU 64K Men Series C FRN C 5 05 CPU 32K Mem Series C FRN C 5705 CPU 16K Mem Series C FRN 5 05 CPU 64K Mem 0 5705 CPU 32K Mem 5 05 CPU 16K Men 5 05 CPU 64K Men 5705 CPU 32K Mem
219. le including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 18 EtherNet IP Objects Bit Name Description 26 Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot be written if the I O data being exchanged between the Host and the peripheral is valid 27 Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file co
220. lect Communications gt Who Active to try to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver in RSLinx Refer to the RSLinx online help Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 goes into the Online mode and the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the window should be flashing green Also a yellow warning symbol should be displayed on the I O Configuration folder in the treeview and on the drive profile If the controller was in Run Mode before clicking Download RSLogix 5000 prompts you to change the controller mode back to Remote Run In this case choose the appropriate mode for your application If the controller was in Program Mode before clicking Download this prompt will not appear Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears Navigate to a folder type a file name and click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer To ensure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload and save them Correlating the Drive with the Controller You must now correlate the drive settings to the RSLogix 5000 project T O settings so that they
221. lication 750COM UM001A EN P 8 6 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Configure E mail Notification Web Page I Rockwell Automati Expand Minimize D Process display D TCP IP configurati Configure e mail n Ca Browse devices Online user manu D Software tools We TX Launch my DriveE 8 Launch my DriveE 2 E mail technical s Figure 8 4 Example of Configure E mail Notification Web Page oft Internet Explorer The Configure E mail Notification web page contains selections and data fields for configuring the adapter to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected types of events occur By default settings are not protected After configuration settings can be protected by using Parameter 53 Web Features to set E mail Cfg Bit 0 value to 0 Disabled To change a protected configuration it must first be unprotected by setting the E mail Cfg Bit 0 value back to 1 Enabled Rockwell Automation D Send an e mail message when a fault trip is declared on the DPI host drive OFor any fault O Only for the following faults example 1 3 5 8 OFor all faults except the following faults example 1 3 5 8 E Send an e mail mes when a fault on the drive is deared O Send an e mail message when an alarm is declared on the DPI host drive OFor any alarm O Only for the following alarms example 1 3 5 8 OFor all alarms except the following alarms example 1 3 5 8 E Send an e mai
222. ling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When selecting a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A will write the parameter value to temporary memory so the parameter value will be lost after the drive is power cycled It is recommended to use the A setting when frequent write messages are required 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the O Configuration folder for this example My_PowerFlex_755_Drive 4 n this example Accel Time 1 is a 32 bit floating point parameter so the Data Type field must be set to REAL when creating the controller tag To write to a 32 bit DINT parameter set the tag Data Type field to DINT For a 16 bit parameter set the Data Type field to INT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a REAL or DINT or 2 bytes for an INT Refer to the dr
223. loads PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 17 Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OXFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OXFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OXFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OXFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance OXFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance OXFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance OxFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OXFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OXFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OXFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 number of decimal places to be displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates 18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2 to not limit the number of decimal places used 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter 0
224. ls 3 1 Using the Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM 3 1 Using BOOTP 3 2 Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 3 5 Setting the Data Rate 3 7 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer 3 8 Setting a Fault Action 3 14 Setting Web Access Control 3 16 Resetting the Adapter 3 17 Restoring Adapter Parameters to Factory Defaults 3 17 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 3 18 Flash Updating the Adapter 3 18 For a list of parameters refer to Appendix B Adapter Parameters For definitions of terms in this chapter refer to the Glossary The embedded EtherNet IP adapter stores parameters and other information in its own non volatile memory You must therefore access the adapter to view and edit its parameters The following tools can be used to access the adapter parameters Tool Refer to Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM User Manual BOOTP Server page 3 2 DriveExplorer Software http www ab com drives driveexplorer or version 6 01 or higher DriveExplorer online help installed with the software DriveExecutive Software http www ab com drives drivetools or version 5 01 or higher DriveExecutive online help installed with the software If your drive has an enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM it can be used to access parameters in the adapter For details on viewing and editing parameters refer to the Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM User Manual publication 20HIM UMO01
225. lt Values Type Reset Required 0 Fault 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Read Write No Msg Fit Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted By ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 57 default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Fit Cfg Logic Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 54 Comm FIt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 55 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 56 Peer Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and Peer I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 57 Msg Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted The bit definitions in the Logic Command word for PowerFlex 750 Series drives are shown in Appendix D Fit Cfg Ref Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Para
226. lt configuration parameters in the adapter When a fault action parameter is set to use the fault configuration data and a fault occurs the data from these parameters is sent as the Logic Command Reference and or Datalink s Flash Update The process of updating firmware in a device The adapter can be flash updated using various Allen Bradley software tools Refer to Flash Updating the Adapter on page 3 18 for more information Gateway A device on a network that connects an individual network to a system of networks When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network a gateway transfers the data between the two networks You need to configure the address for the gateway device in the adapter if you want the adapter to communicate with devices that are not on its network Hardware Address Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address sometimes called a MAC address that is 48 bits The address appears as six digits separated by colons for example xx xx xx xx xx xx Each digit has a PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P G 4 Glossary value between 0 and 255 0x00 and OxFF This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed It is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP utility HIM Human Interface Module A device that can be used to configure and control a drive Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs for example 20 HIM
227. mand Otherwise set Parameter 78 to a value of 0 For bit definitions refer to Appendix D or the drive documentation If a Reference is being sent use Parameter 79 Ref Src Cfg to set the Datalink number containing the Reference Otherwise set Parameter 79 to a value of 0 In each PowerFlex 750 Series slave drive set drive parameter 308 Direction Mode to 1 Bipolar to ensure that it properly follows the master drive s speed reference and commanded direction Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder so that changes to Parameter 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg take effect Set Parameter 85 Fr Peer Enable to a value of 2 Custom Figure 3 15 Edit Fr Peer Enable HIM Screen Value Setting 0 Off Default 1 Cmd Ref 2 Custom PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 3 14 Configuring the Adapter Setting a Fault Action By default when I O communications are disrupted for example the network cable is disconnected the controller is idle in program mode or faulted and or Peer I O or explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted the drive responds by faulting You can configure a different response to e Disrupted I O communication by using Parameter 54 Comm Fit Action e An idle controller by using Parameter 55 Idle Flt Action
228. mars The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single write message General Tab Example Value Description Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write 1 Controller type and command type for controller to write data to the drive Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file Size in Elements 2 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which EtherNet IP network is connected Data Table Address N154 70 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive refer to page C 9 MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow EtherNet messaging to be routed to the drive MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 Important PCCC N150 N File write messages are written to the drive s EEPROM Be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction PLC 5 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this example we use the data table address in Figure 6 20 to store the request value 10 1 sec that was written to drive parameter 535 Accel Time 1 Figure 6 20 Example Set Attribute SIngle Request Data File File F103 j TIP To verify that the parameter val
229. meout is reached Parameter 56 Peer Flt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if the adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a hazard of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 10 11 Configuring the Adapter 3 13 Figure 3 13 Edit Peer Fit Action HIM Screen Value Description 0 Fault Default 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg For more details about fault action see Setting a Fault Action on page 3 14 Set Parameters 81 Fr Peer Addr 1 through 84 Fr Peer Addr 4 to the IP address of the drive transmitting the custom Peer I O Figure 3 14 Edit Fr Peer Addr 1 Screen on the HIM IP Address of Node Transmitting Custom Peer I O Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Peer Inp Addr 1 Peer Inp Addr 2 Peer Inp Addr 3 Peer Inp Addr 4 If a Logic Command is being sent use Parameter 78 Logic Sre Cfg to set the Datalink number containing the Logic Com
230. meter 54 Comm FIt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 55 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 56 Peer Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and Peer I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 57 Msg Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 Read Write No 0 3 40282 x 1098 3 40282 x 1038 Read Write No Parameter No Name and Description 60 Fit Cfg DL 01 61 FIt Cfg DL 02 62 FIt Cfg DL 03 63 Fit Cfg DL 04 64 Fit Cfg DL 05 65 FIt Cfg DL 06 66 FIt Cfg DL 07 67 FIt Cfg DL 08 68 Fit Cfg DL 09 69 FIt Cfg DL 10 70 Flt Cfg DL 11 71 Flt Cfg DL 12 72 Flt Cfg DL 13 73 Flt Cfg DL 14 74 FIt Cfg DL 15 75 FIt Cfg DL 16 Sets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 54 Comm Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 55 Idle Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and th
231. meters for the Configuring the Adapter following functions as required by your application e P address subnet mask and gateway address only when not using adapter switches e Data rate e O configuration e Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy e Fault actions e Web enable features 6 Configure the controller to communicate with the Chapter 4 adapter Configuring the I O Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix to configure the master on the EtherNet IP network to recognize the embedded EtherNet IP adapter and drive 7 Create a ladder logic program Chapter 5 ing the Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix to create Using the VO a ladder logic program that enables you to Chapter 6 e Control the embedded EtherNet IP adapter and drive Using Explicit Messaging using I O e Monitor or configure the drive using Explicit messages PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 1 6 Getting Started Status Indicators The embedded EtherNet IP adapter uses two status indicators to report its operating status They can be viewed with the HIM cradle closed or open Figure 1 2 Figure 1 2 Status Indicators Embedded EtherNet IP adapter status indicators Indicators shown with HIM bezel on main control board in drive control pod closed and drive cover installed 8
232. more message connections is decreased network PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 2 Using Explicit Messaging Performing Explicit Messages performance If your application cannot tolerate this do not check the Connected box TIP To message to another device in a different drive port refer to the Instance table in Appendix C e DPI Parameter Object section on page C 13 for Device parameters e Host DPI Parameter Object section on page C 28 for Host parameters In the Message Configuration screen set the Instance field to an appropriate value within the range listed for the port in which the device resides There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process The details of each step will vary depending on the type of controller being used Refer to the documentation for your controller Important There must be a request message and a response message for all Explicit Messages whether you are reading or writing data Figure 6 1 Explicit Message Process Set up and send Explicit o Message Request Complete Explicit Message iT T i a Yrs o Retrieve Explicit Message Response Event Description You format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message request to the scanner or bridge module download The scanner or bridge mo
233. mputer to the drive using a 1203 USB or 1203 SSS serial converter When flashing over the network you can use the Allen Bradley software tool ControlFLASH the built in flash capability of DriveExplorer Lite or Full or the built in flash capability of DriveExecutive When flashing through a direct serial connection from a computer to a drive you can use the same Allen Bradley software tools described above or you can use HyperTerminal set to the X modem protocol To obtain a flash update for this adapter go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate This site contains all firmware update files and associated Release Notes that describe firmware update enhancements anomalies how to determine the existing firmware version and how to flash update using DriveExplorer DriveExecutive or ControlFLASH PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Chapter 4 Configuring the I O This chapter provides instructions on how to configure a Rockwell Automation controller ControlLogix PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 to communicate with the adapter and PowerFlex drive Topic Page Using RSLinx Classic 4 1 ControlLogix Example 4 2 Limitations When Using PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 4 20 PLC 5 Example 4 21 SLC 500 Example 4 29 MicroLogix 1100 Example 4 37 Using RSLinx Classic RSLinx Classic in all its variations Lite Gateway OEM etc
234. n UINT 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error UINT The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Instance Attributes EtherNet IP Objects C 29 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline Minimum value CONTAINER Offline Maximum value CONTAINER Offline Default value STRING 16 X Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad byte always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value UINT Multiplier UNIT Divisor UNIT Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 31 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value UINT Next parameter UINT Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Am
235. n its present state 4 Send Fit Cfg The drive is sent the data that you set in the fault configuration parameters Parameters 58 FIt Cfg Logic 59 FIt Cfg Ref and 60 Flt Cfg DL 01 through 75 Fit Cfg DL 16 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the Adapter 3 15 Figure 3 16 Edit Fault Action HIM Screens Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters If you set Parameter 54 Comm Fit Action 55 Idle Flt Action 56 Peer FIt Action or Parameter 57 Msg FIt Action to Send Fit Cfg the values in the following parameters are sent to the drive after an I O communications fault idle fault Peer I O fault and or explicit messaging for drive control fault occurs You must set these parameters to values required by your application Parameter Parameter 58 FIt Cfg Logic Description A 32 bit value sent to the drive for Logic Command Parameter 59 Flt Cfg Ref A 32 bit REAL floating point value sent to the drive for Reference Parameter 60 Flt Cfg DL 01 through Parameter 75 Flt Cfg DL 16 A 32 bit integer value sent to the drive for a Datalink If the destination of the Datalink is a REAL floating point parameter you must convert the desired value to the binary representation of the REAL value An internet search of hex t
236. name assigned when configuring the I O Chapter 4 Figure 5 2 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using Add On Drive Profiles for Logic Status Feedback My PowerFlex 755 Drive l DriveStatus Ready My PowerFlex 755 Drive l DriveStatus Active My Powerl lex_ 55_Drive DriveStatus_ActualDir Status Ready J Status_Active s Status orward My Powerl lex 55 Urive l DriveStatus ActualDir LP Status Reverse My Powerl lex 55 Urive l DriveStatus I aulted es Status aulted jt My Powerl lex 55 Drive l DriveStatus AtS5peed C2 Status At Speed C Copy File Dest Length OP Source My Powerllex 55 Urive l F eedback Speed Feedback 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 5 8 Using the I O Figure 5 3 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using Add On Drive Profiles for Logic Command Reference Command Stop My PowerFlex 755 Drive O LogicCommand Stop JE Command_Start Command_Jog Command_Clear_Faults My_PowerFlex_755_Drive O LogicCommand_ClearFaulls lt gt My_PoworFlex_755_Drive 0 LogicCommand_Start C My Powerl lex 55 Drive O LogicCommand 4Jog1 4 2 J q F Command_Forward_Reverse My_PoworFlex_755_DriveO LogicCommand_Forward Command lI orward_Reverse My Powerl lex 55 Urive O LogicCommand Reverse
237. network based on the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Glossary G 3 TCP IP UDP IP and CIP Designed for industrial communications both I O and explicit messages can be transmitted over the network Each device is assigned a unique IP address and transmits data on the network The number of devices that an EtherNet IP network can support depends on the class of IP address For example a network with a Class C IP address can have 254 nodes General information about EtherNet IP and the EtherNet IP specification are maintained by the Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association ODVA ODVA is online at http www odva org Explicit Messaging Explicit messages are used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates They are typically used to configure monitor and diagnose devices over the network Fault Action A fault action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when a communications fault for example a cable is disconnected occurs or when the controller is switched out of run mode The former uses a communications fault action and the latter uses an idle fault action Fault Configuration When communications are disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond with a user defined fault configuration The user sets the data that is sent to the drive using specific fau
238. nfiguring the I O 4 43 Creating MicroLogix 1100 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG12 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG12 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG12 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction Figure 4 47 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 48 Figure 4 47 MicroLogix 1100 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks MSG Read Write Message CEN 9 3 MSG File MG12 0 CDN5 Setup Screen CER 5 MG12 0 MG12 0 j CUD DN EN MG12 0 ER Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 44 Configuring t
239. ng a Message to Read Single Parameter Figure 6 22 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens EEM N13 0 58 Elements General MAH Send Data Receive Data From Device his SLESOX EEM N13 0 98 Elements General Mutiop Send Data Receive Data Thee Controler Message Corisol Bis Chonnal 1 Ignore i timed cut TO 0 Size in Words eceive Data p Send Date D Awaiting Execuson Ew 6 Data Table Address Receive Datak Send Data Continuous Aun CO n Ener ER 0 Target Device Done DNI o Message Timeout x1 sec Transmiting T f Malen res Enabled EN 0 Serce Beren Ger Ainbute Sings Service Code thent E Waiting for Queue Space 5 Chass hex dec Instance hex dec Ambue hes s deck 3 Enor Code hes g Eno Eno Descipbon No onors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single read message General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 20 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the response file Service Generic Get Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 7 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 D
240. ngle Type Sevke mo Code 110 Instance Hex Class 535 Atribute Source Element Accel Time 1 Seucelengh A Mye Destination zi New Tag Q Enable EnableWatng Stat D Fror Code Enor Path Eror Text Extended Eror Code Done Length 0 T Timed Out The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a single write message Configuration Tab Message Type Service Type Service Code Class Instance Attribute Source Element Example Value CIP Generic Set Attribute Single 10 Hex 93 Hex 535 Dec 9 or A Hex Accel_Time_1 Description Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter This service is used to write a parameter value Code for the requested service Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 4 bytes 4 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Leave blank not applicable Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My PowerFlex 755 Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Write Message The name for the message The default setting for Service Type is Custom enab
241. ngle Write Message B3 0 MSG JE Read Write Message CEN gt 1 Control MG14 0 C DN 5 Setup Screen CER gt Three COP Copy instructions are required to convert the 16 bit integer data table addresses N50 0 Least Significant Word and N50 1 Most Significant Word to a 32 bit REAL floating point data table address F103 0 for correct presentation The first COP instruction correctly writes the 32 bit REAL floating point value The second and third COP instructions swap the LSW and MSW PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 17 PLC 5 Formatting a Message to Write Single Parameter Figure 6 19 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens MSG MG14 0 2 Elements Gerreval MuitiHop dna Add Hop Del Remove Hep From Device From Pot To Address Type To Address The PLCS 2 EtherNet IP Device str 10 31 100 73 MSG MG14 0 2 Elements DEK Genesal MuliHop This PLC Control Bits Communication Command PLCS Typed Wate Ignore i bmed out TO 0 Data Table Address n00 To be retied INF 0 Sion in Elements Arvating Execution EW 0 Poit Number 2 Continuous Run C 0 Enc ERI 0 Tagu Devico Message done DN 0 Osa Table Address N1470 Message Tiansmitieg ST 0 Muti Message Enabled EN 0 Ene Ewa CodelHew 0 Enor Description No a
242. nificant N45 3 Reference most significant Feedback most significant N45 4 DL From Net 01 least significant DL To Net 01 least significant N45 5 DL From Net 01 most significant DL To Net 01 most significant N45 6 DL From Net 02 least significant DL To Net 02 least significant N45 7 DL From Net 02 most significant DL To Net 02 most significant N45 8 DL From Net 03 least significant DL To Net 03 least significant N45 9 DL From Net 03 most significant DL To Net 03 most significant N45 10 DL From Net 04 least significant DL To Net 04 least significant N45 11 DL From Net 04 most significant DL To Net 04 most significant N45 12 DL From Net 05 least significant DL To Net 05 least significant N45 13 DL From Net 05 most significant DL To Net 05 most significant N45 14 DL From Net 06 least significant DL To Net 06 least significant N45 15 DL From Net 06 most significant DL To Net 06 most significant N45 16 DL From Net 07 least significant DL To Net 07 least significant N45 17 DL From Net 07 most significant DL To Net 07 most significant N45 18 DL From Net 08 least significant DL To Net 08 least significant N45 19 DL From Net 08 most significant DL To Net 08 most significant N45 20 DL From Net 09 least significant DL To Net 09 least significant N45 21 DL From Net 09 most significant DL To Net 09 most significant N45 22 DL From Net 10 least significant DL To Net 10 least
243. nks 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG READ 500CPU LOCAL Nxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example N11 n and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example N11 0 Then press Enter 2 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC Nxx n 13 NXB XIC Nxx n 12 BND OTU Nxx n 15 where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example N11 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter 3 In the MSG instruction Figure 4 37 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 38 Figure 4 37 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datalinks MSG mm Read Write Message A EN 0 34 Type Peer To Peer Read Write Read DN25 Target Device 500CPU Local Remote Local ER 5 Control Block N11 0 Control Block Length 51 Setup Screen NI1 0 N11 0 TE gt 13 15 N11 0 12 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 34 Confi
244. nnection will be larger than necessary which needlessly increases controller response time and memory usage TIP When using a ControlLogix controller and an RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profile v16 or higher there is no need to configure Datalink parameters at this time They will be assigned when configuring the RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profile see Adding the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration on page 4 5 When using a ControlLogix controller and the Generic Profile or a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controller configure the Datalink parameters now as described in this section Parameters 01 DL From Net 01 through 16 DL From Net 16 control which parameters in the drive adapter or any other connected peripheral receive the values from the network The enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive provide user friendly screens to help select the drive or peripheral by port number and the parameter by name As an alternate method the parameter value can be set manually by number using this formula From Net Parameter Value 10000 Port Number Destination Parameter Number For example suppose you want to use Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 to write to Parameter 03 of an optional encoder card plugged into PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the Adapter 3 9 drive Port 5 Using the formula the value for Parameter
245. not used to control the drive verify that all unused digital input parameters are set to Not Used To commission the embedded EtherNet IP adapter you must set a unique IP address See the Glossary for details about IP addresses When using the adapter switches refer to Setting the IP Address Switches on page 2 2 When not using the adapter switches use either a BOOTP server or adapter parameters to set the IP address after connecting the adapter to the network and applying power to the drive By default the adapter is configured so that you must set the IP address using a BOOTP server For details see Using BOOTP on page 3 2 To set the IP address using adapter parameters refer to Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address on page 3 5 Important New settings for some adapter parameters for example Parameters 38 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 41 IP Addr Cfg 4 are recognized only when power is applied to the adapter or it is reset After you change parameter settings cycle power or reset the adapter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuration Tools Using the Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter This chapter provides instructions and information for setting the parameters to configure the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Topic Page Configuration Too
246. nt Reference the following method works only if the drives transmitting and receiving are PowerFlex 750 Series drives To set up the master broadcast side of simple Peer I O 1 Set Parameters 89 To Peer Period and 90 To Peer Skip as desired for your application Parameter 89 controls how frequently the adapter will transmit present data Parameter 90 controls how many transmit opportunities can be skipped if the data to be transmitted has not changed 2 Set Parameter 91 To Peer Enable to a value of 1 Cmd Ref PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the Adapter 3 11 Figure 3 11 Edit To Peer Enable HIM Screen Value Setting 0 Off Default 1 Cmd Ref 2 Custom To set up the slave receiver side of simple Peer I O 1 4 Set Parameter 80 Fr Peer Timeout to a suitable timeout value for your application This value should be greater than the product of Parameter 89 To Peer Period and Parameter 90 To Peer Skip in the transmitting drive Set Parameters 81 Fr Peer Addr 1 through 84 Fr Peer Addr 4 to the IP address of the drive transmitting Peer I O In each PowerFlex 750 Series slave drive set drive parameter 308 Direction Mode to 1 Bipolar to ensure that it properly follows the master drive s speed reference and commanded direction Set Parameter 85 Fr Peer Enable to a value of 1
247. nt The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter 3 In the MSG instruction Figure 4 39 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 40 Figure 4 39 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks MSG Read Write Message C EN Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write CDN gt Target Device 500CPU Local Remote Local ER Control Block N12 0 Control Block Length 51 Setup Screen lt N12 0 N12 0 JE CUD 13 15 N12 0 12 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 36 Configuring the I O General Tab Box This Controller Figure 4 40 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks i MSG N12 0 51 Elements Del Remove Hon From Device From Pot To Address Type To Address This SLC 5 05 Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 31 100 79 DoR Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO 0 To be retried NR 0 Awating Execution ewu Continuous Run C u Enor ER U Message done DN 0 Message Transmitting ST 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Wailing for Queue S
248. nt word in the input image This manual contains the bit definitions for compatible products available at the time of publication in Appendix D Logic Command Status Words for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives The Reference is a 32 bit REAL floating point piece of control data produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Feedback is a 32 bit REAL floating point piece of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller The Reference and Feedback 32 bit values represent engineering units For example a 32 bit REAL Reference value of 30 0 equals a Reference of 30 0 Hz Note that the commanded maximum speed can never exceed the value of drive Parameter 510 Max Fwd Speed Table 5 C shows example References and their results for a PowerFlex 755 drive that has its Parameter 37 Maximum Freq set to 130 Hz and Parameter 520 Max Fwd Speed set to 60 Hz When using a ControlLogix controller the 32 bit REAL Reference is always DINT 1 in the output image and the 32 bit REAL Feedback is always DINT 1 in the input image when using the Add On Profile or DINT 2 when using the Generic Profile For a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controller the 32 bit REAL Reference word is always words 2 least significant word and 3 most significant word in the output image and the 32 bit REAL Feedback is always words 2 least significant word and 3 most significant word in the input image Because the I O image is
249. ntains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10 Decima Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 10 Decima Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Object Specific Services Implemented for Allocation Size in bytes Service Code Class Instance Service Name Par Number Par Value 0x4D Yes No Get Attributes Scattered 4 4 Ox4E Yes No Set Attributes Scattered 4 4 The table below lists the paramete
250. nternational online units 20 Get International DPI Online Struct of Read Full BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default value UINT Next UINT Previous UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset USINT 3 Link USINT Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor UDINT Extended Descriptor see page C 17 22 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Read Full BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER _ Offline default value UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad word always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER _ Parameter value UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset BOOL 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International DPI parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is al
251. o Cenmuncaon Cond diurni Dala Table Aides Receive N60 0 Seal N66 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Sur in Bytes Reveive 40 Ser 40 Lor LH n Target Device Message done DN fn Message Timeout 33 Message Trarmmilling 5T 0 Message Freblesd FN n Local Remote Local MutiHon Yes Freude Rouling Info File ACX Rp 13 0 Enor Servico nium ___ _Servioe Code test Enor CodefHes 0 Clave hes deck Inetance hex n decr n Attibute hes y deck fu Erce Description No enos The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a multiple read message General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction Receive N60 0 This address is the starting word of the response file Send N70 0 This address is the starting word of the request file Size in Bytes Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Receive 40 2 Number of bytes to be received Send 40 Number of bytes to be sent Extended Routing RIX19 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4D Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 De
252. o float provides a link to a tool to do this conversion Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 3 16 Configuring the Adapter Setting Web Access Control By using a web browser to access the IP address set for the adapter you can view the adapter s web pages for information about the adapter the drive and other DPI devices connected to the drive such as HIMs or converters Additionally the adapter can be configured to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action For more details on the adapter s web pages refer to Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages By default the adapter web pages are disabled To enable the adapter web pages set Parameter 52 Web Enable to 1 Enabled and then reset the adapter for the change to take effect Figure 3 17 Edit Web Enable HIM Screen Value Description 0 Disabled Default 1 Enabled Bit 0 of Parameter 53 Web Features is used to protect the configured settings for e mail messaging By default settings are not protected and the user can make changes To protect the configured settings set the value of E mail Cfg Bit 0 to 0 Disabled You can unprotect the configuration by changing Bit 0 ba
253. o proceed _ Wood Download comes He Show Detais 3 The I O Configuration Differences screen Figure 4 18 appears Figure 4 18 1 0 Configuration Differences Screen VO Configuration Differences Project v16 Example usrxy Emid Nel fax PF755 My PuwerFiex 755 Drive Drive AB_ETHIP 1 10 91 100 79 Ingut Data Output Data Project StopModea 370 Undefined 1 s 370 StopModcB 371 Undefined_2 374 AccelTIme1 535 Undefined_3 535 AccelTime2 536 Undefined_4 i 536 DecelTIme1 537 Undefined 5 537 DecelTime2 638 Undefined 6 i 638 JogAccDecTime 539 Undefined 7 JogAccDecTime 559 Undefined 7 JogSpeedi 666 Undefined 8 JogSpeed1 556 Undefined 8 Ana Speed 557 Undefined 8 Joa Sneed 557 Undefined 8 Datalinks in the drive do not match the project I O configuration Click the Use Use Project Project button to configure the drive to match the project settings If you wish to change the I O configuration in the project you must go offine with the controller and change the I O configuration in the Module Definition v eee PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 15 To match the Datalinks in the drive to the project I O configuration click Use Project After the datalinks have been matched the Input Data and Output Data columns are grayed out Click Continue A series of download dialog boxes appear which
254. oOcOcocococococooococcoococoocco 4294967295 Read Write No 0 0 16 Read Write Yes 0 0 16 Read Only 0 0 16 Read Write No 0 0 16 Read Write No PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P B 8 Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 Fr Peer Timeout Sets the timeout for a Peer I O connection If the time is reached without the adapter receiving consuming a message the adapter will respond with the action specified in Parameter 56 Peer Flt Action In an adapter receiving consuming Peer I O the value of this parameter must be greater than the product of the value of Parameter 89 To Peer Period in the adapter transmitting producing Peer I O multiplied by the value of Parameter 90 To Peer Skip in the adapter transmitting producing Peer I O Fr Peer Addr 1 Fr Peer Addr 2 Fr Peer Addr 3 Fr Peer Addr 4 Sets the bytes in the IP address that specifies the device from which the adapter receives consumes Peer I O data 255 255 255 255 Peer Inp Addr 1 Peer Inp Addr 2 Peer Inp Addr 3 Peer Inp Addr 4 Important The Peer Inp Addr must be on the same subnet as the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Refer to IP Addresses on page G 4 for more information Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 85 Fr Peer Enable is 1 On
255. ocessing Error UINT The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors Set Link Command USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 14 EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline Minimum value CONTAINER Offline Maximum value CONTAINER Offline Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units UINT Online minimum parameter instance UINT Online maximum parameter instance UINT Online default parameter instance UINT Multiplier parameter instance UINT Divisor parameter instance UINT Base parameter instance UINT Offset parameter instance USINT Formula number USINT Pad byte always zero UINT Help instance UINT Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER _ Parameter value UINT Multiplier UNIT Divisor UNIT Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 16 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value UINT Next parameter UINT Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz UINT Multiplier 9 UINT
256. oes not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication Getting Started 1 5 Quick Start This section is provided to help experienced users quickly start using the embedded EtherNet IP adapter If you are unsure how to complete a step refer to the referenced chapter Step Action Refer to 1 Review the safety precautions for the adapter Throughout This Manual 2 Verify that the PowerFlex drive is properly installed PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drive Installation Instructions 3 Set the adapter IP address Chapter 2 A When using the adapter switches set the IP address Installing the Adapter When using a BOOTP server or adapter parameters to set the IP address first perform Step 3B and all of Step 4 Then proceed with Step 5 B Verify that the PowerFlex drive is not powered Then connect the embedded EtherNet IP adapter to the network using an Ethernet cable 4 Apply power to the drive Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter A Replace the drive cover or close the drive door B The embedded EtherNet IP adapter receives power from the drive Apply power to the drive The status indicators should be green If they flash red there is a problem Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C Configure verify key drive parameters 5 Configure the adapter for your application Chapter 3 Set embedded EtherNet IP adapter para
257. older PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 3 8 Configuring the Adapter Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer A hierarchy determines the type of device with which the adapter exchanges data In a Master Slave hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with a master such as a bridge or controller In a Peer to Peer hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with one or more EtherNet IP adapters in other PowerFlex 750 Series drives The drives must have compatible Logic Command Status words For both Master Slave and Peer to Peer hierarchies the devices exchanging data must be on the same IP subnet See IP Addresses in the Glossary for information about IP subnets Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Enabling Datalinks To Write Data The controller output image controller outputs to drive can have anywhere from 0 to 16 additional 32 bit parameters Datalinks They are configured using Parameters 01 DL From Net 01 through 16 DL From Net 16 The number of Datalinks actively used is controlled by the connection size in the controller See the respective controller example sections in Chapter 4 for more information on setting the connection sizes Important Always use the Datalink parameters in consecutive numerical order starting with the first parameter For example use Parameters 01 02 and 03 to configure 3 Datalinks to write data Otherwise the network I O co
258. ommand DecelTimel c BOOL My Powerlex 55 Urnve U LogcLommand Decell mez c BUUL My PowetFlex 755 Drive O LogicCommand SpdRefSel c BOOL My Powerklex 55 Drve U LogcLommand SpdHelsell C BUUL My PowetFlex 755 Drive O LogicCommand SpdRefSel2 BOOL My PowerFlex 55 Drve U LogicLommand Loaststop C BUUL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogicCommand CLimitStop c BOOL My PowerFlex 55 Drnve U LogicLommand Hun 0 guuL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D LogicCommand Jog2 1 c BOOL My FowerHex 55 Dnve U Helerence 0 0 HEAL H My_PowerFlex_755_Drive 0 StopModeA oDINT My PowerHlex 55 Dnve U StopModeB 0 DINI My PowerFlex_755_Drive D AccelTime1 o o REAL My _Fowerhler_ fob DnveU AccellmeZ 0 0 REAL My _PowerFlex_755_Drive 0 DecelTine1 0 0 REAL a My PowetFlex 755 Diive D DecelTime2 v u REAL My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Jog amp ccDecTime 0 0 REAL My PowetFlex 755 Drive O JogSpeedl v v REAL M PowerFlex_755_Drive 0 JogSpeed2 5 6 REAL My PowetFlex 755 Dtive D PresetSpeedl u o REAL My PowerFlex 755 Drive O PresetSpeed2 c c REAL My_PowerFlex_755_Drive 0 PresetSpeed3 v u REAL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D PresetSpeed4 6 6 REAL My PowetFlex 755 Drive D PresetSpeed5 v v REAL My PowerFlex 755 Drive D PresetSpeede 6 6 REAL My PowerFlex 755 Drive O PresetSpeed7 u o REAL Saving the I O Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O
259. on Figure 4 45 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 46 Figure 4 45 MicroLogix 1100 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datalinks MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG11 0 EN 2 34 CDN Setup Screen CER gt MG11 0 MG11 0 JE CU DN EN MGI1 0 ER Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 42 Configuring the I O Figure 4 46 MicroLogix 1100 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status Feedback and DL From Net Datalinks i MSG MG11 0 1 Elements General Mut lop Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hon From Port To Address Type To Address Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device su 10 91 10079 EOR F MSG MG11 0 1 Elements General Mutton This Controller Control Bits Channel 1 Integral Ignore i timed wa T0 0 Communication Command SNNCPL Read Breck Connection 6k 2 Data Table Address N21 Awaiting Execution ewi Size in Elements 36 a Ewe ER 0 Tayel Device Message done DN o Message Timeout 33 Message ranemetting S fv Data Table Addess Naso Message Enabled IEN Local Remote MukiHup Ee Routing Information Filefil Fu Circe Code llex 0 Error Description No errors
260. on Parameter 89 controls how frequently the adapter will transmit present data Parameter 90 controls how many transmit opportunities can be skipped if the data to be transmitted has not changed Set Parameter 91 To Peer Enable to a value of 2 Custom To set up the slave receiver side of custom Peer I O 1 5 Decide how many pieces of data Logic Command Reference and Datalink parameters you want to receive This must match the number of parameters transmitted by the master Set Parameter 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg to that value Determine how the Datalinks are allocated The highest numbered of the 16 Datalinks are allocated to Peer I O For example if Parameter 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg is set to 3 Datalinks 14 15 and 16 are allocated to Peer I O To avoid an overlap between Master Slave and Peer I O make sure that Parameter 34 DLs From Net Act plus Parameter 76 DLs Fr Peer Cfg does not total more than 16 Set Parameters 1 through 16 DL From Net 01 16 to the parameters you want to receive based on the allocation in Step 2 Set Parameter 80 Fr Peer Timeout to a suitable timeout value for your application This value should be greater than the product of Parameter 89 To Peer Period and Parameter 90 To Peer Skip in the transmitting drive Figure 3 12 Edit Fr Peer Timeout HIM Screen Set Parameter 56 Peer Flt Action to the desired action if Peer I O data is not received before the ti
261. ort 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 0x5C00 Ox5FFF 23552 24575 Port 7 0x6000 Ox63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 Ox6BFF 26624 27647 Port 10 0x6C00 Ox6FFF 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 Ox73FF 28672 29695 Port 12 0x7400 Ox77FF 29696 30719 Port 13 0x7800 Ox7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision UINT Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances UINT Maximum number of faults events that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Fault Command Write USINT 0 No Operation 1 Clear Fault Event 2 Clear Fault Event Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Trip Instance Read UINT Fault that tripped the device For adapters this value is always 1 when faulted PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 20 EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 5 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved USINT USINT UINT n 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty y Get Fault Parameter Reference UINT Reserved Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of UINT Fault code STRUCT of Fault so
262. ose The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a zero value disallowing control messages to be sent to the adapter 44 MsgCtrl Timeout The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object elapsed between accesses of those objects 45 PeerlO Open The adapter received the first Peer I O message 46 Peer IO Timeout The adapter has not received a Peer I O message for longer than the Peer I O Timeout 47 54 Reserved 55 BOOTP Response The adapter received a response to its BOOTP request 56 E mailFailed The adapter encountered an error attempting to send a requested e mail message 57 Option Card Fit The adapter experienced a generic fault condition drive only 58 Module Defaulted The adapter has been set to defaults PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 7 6 Troubleshooting Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Chapter 8 Accessing the Adapter Web Home Page Viewing the Adapter Web Pages This chapter provides instructions on how to monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive by using the adapter s web interface Topic Page Accessing the Adapter Web Home Page 8 1 Process Display Pop up Window 8 4 TCP IP Configuration Web Page 8 5 Configure E mail Notification Web Page 8 6 DPI Device Information Pages
263. ou or Rockwell Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem Adapter diagnostic items can be viewed using the enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM DriveExplorer software version 6 01 or higher or DriveExecutive software version 5 01 or higher For details on viewing diagnostic items using the HIM refer to the Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM User Manual publication 20HIM UMO001 Table 7 A Adapter Diagnostic Items No 1 Name Common Logic Cmd Description The present value of the Common Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this adapter Common Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter Feedback The present value of the Feedback being received from the drive by this adapter Input Size Size of data transferred from the network to the drive CO O71 A Co PO Output Size Size of data transferred from the drive to the network DL Fr Net Avail The number of From Net Datalinks currently available to the adapter DL To Net Avail The number of To Net Datalinks currently available to the adapter
264. ow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When selecting a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable When reading 32 bit REAL floating point parameters as in this example data conversion using COP Copy instructions or UDDT s is required to correctly show the parameter values BS Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder for this example My_PowerFlex_755_Drive In this example we are reading five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters Each parameter being read requires two contiguous DINT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to DINT 10 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 40 bytes for a DINT 10 array Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum message length is 256 bytes which can read up to 32 parameters regardless of their size S The controller tag for Scattered Read Response must be the same size as the controller tag for
265. p so that a scanner configures or transmits data to one PowerFlex 750 Series drive which then sends the same configuration or data to other PowerFlex 750 Series drives on the network To use a peer to peer hierarchy you configure one adapter to transmit data and one or more adapters to receive the data Ping A message that is sent on the network to determine if a node exists PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series drives are part of the PowerFlex 7 Class family of drives Reference Feedback The Reference is used to send a setpoint for example speed frequency torque to the drive It consists of one 32 bit word of output to the adapter from the network Feedback is used to monitor the speed of the drive It consists of one 32 bit word of input from the adapter to the network RSLogix 5 500 5000 RSLogix software is a tool for configuring and monitoring controllers to communicate with connected devices It is a 32 bit application that runs on various Windows operating systems Information about RSLogix software can be found at http www software rockwell com rslogix Scanner A scanner is a separate module of a multi module controller or a built in component of a single module controller that provides communication with adapters connected to a network See also Controller Status Indicators Status indicators are LEDs that are used to report the status of the adapter ne
266. pace 0 This Controller Communication Command Dala Table Address Size in Elements Channet fi Target Device Message Timeout Dala Tabie Ackliess Local Remote MutHop ves Error Fror CodefHex N Fror Description No errors Setting Communication Command This setting is unavailable grayed out and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung Data Table Address N20 37 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive Size in Elements 36 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Channel 1 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout This setting is unavailable grayed out Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 N45 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow Ethernet messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Address
267. ps Hz UINT Multiplier 9 UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset USINT 3 Link source of the value 0 no link USINT Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 31 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS 9 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory 11 Get Set DPI Link USINT 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance UINT ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 31 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 16 Get Parameter Processing USINT 0 No error Error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 18 Get International DPI Offline Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 30 EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 19 Get International DPI Online Struct of Parameter Text STRINGN
268. pter IP Address The IP address of the adapter In the Module Definition section click Change to launch the Module Definition screen Figure 4 9 and begin the drive adapter configuration process Figure 4 9 Module Definition Screen Module Definition Revitionr fi f5 Y Electronic Keying Compatbie Mode Drive Rating WOY 48 ND 4 84 HU Rating Optore Nome Duty ND C Heavy Duty HD z Spocial Type Selected Rating Selected Calsug Coaneeton Data Format Parameters wa Catalans Parameters Create Databare Web Update Match Deve Input Data Output Data DriveStatus Feedback LegeCeemmand Reference V Use Network Reference EEEEEEEEE Let b BI Ei EEE EI DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur when improperly using software to configure a drive Parameter nanes selected for the Input and Oulput Dala appear as member names in the dive ModuleDetined Dala Types and deres necesitan Datalink parameters in the FISLogi SOOU proreck Actual dots traniter between controller and drive is determined by Datalink parameters You must download configuration to the drive to ensure that the controller drive and communication module configurations are corten veh each olies NP In the Module Definition screen edit the following information Box Revision Setting The major and minor revision of the firmware in the drive If the drive s
269. r Extended Routing RIX15 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Generic Get Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 7 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When selecting a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which grays out unavailable 0 n this example Output Current is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter Therefore set the Data Table Address to F type floating point If the parameter being read is a 32 bit integer the Data Table Address type would be set to L long word 8 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit REAL floating point parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 34 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this example we use the data table address in Figure
270. r Parameter Value Description 01 DL From Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 02 DL From Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 03 DL From Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 04 DL From Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 05 DL From Net 05 1537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 06 DL From Net 06 1538 Points to drive Par 538 Decel Time 2 07 DL From Net 07 539 Points to drive Par 539 Jog Acc Dec Time 08 DL From Net 08 556 Points to drive Par 556 Jog Speed 1 09 DL From Net 09 1557 Points to drive Par 557 Jog Speed 2 10 DL From Net 10 571 Points to drive Par 571 Preset Speed 1 11 DL From Net 11 1572 Points to drive Par 572 Preset Speed 2 12 DL From Net 12 573 Points to drive Par 573 Preset Speed 3 13 DL From Net 13 574 Points to drive Par 574 Preset Speed 4 14 DL From Net 14 575 Points to drive Par 575 Preset Speed 5 15 DL From Net 15 576 Points to drive Par 576 Preset Speed 6 16 DL From Net 16 577 Points to drive Par 577 Preset Speed 7 17 DL To Net 01 370 Points to drive Par 370 Stop Mode A 18 DL To Net 02 371 Points to drive Par 371 Stop Mode B 19 DL To Net 03 535 Points to drive Par 535 Accel Time 1 20 DL To Net 04 536 Points to drive Par 536 Accel Time 2 21 DL To Net 05 537 Points to drive Par 537 Decel Time 1 22
271. r being written to requires four contiguous 16 bit words Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Therefore the Size in Bytes must be set to 40 The data structure format is shown in Figure 6 52 on page 6 43 Maximum length is 128 words 256 bytes which equates to 32 parameters 9 Service Code 4E write messages are written to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important Be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 41 MicroLogix 1100 Example Scattered Write Request Data In this example we use the F101 data table addresses to store the request values to be written to these 32 bit REAL floating point parameters PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Address Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 F101 0 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 F101 1 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 F101 2 33 3 Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 F101 3 44 4 Hz 571 Preset Speed 7 F101 4 55 5 Hz Figure 6 49 shows the parameter values which in this example have been converted using a CPW Copy Word instruction one for each value to correctly write their values The CPW instruction separ
272. rameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Pad 7 Parameter Value 8 Parameter Number 8 Parameter Number 9 Pad 9 Parameter Value 10 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Number 11 Pad 11 Parameter Value 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Pad 13 Parameter Value 14 Parameter Number 14 Parameter Number 15 Pad 15 Parameter Value 16 Parameter Number 16 Parameter Number 17 Pad 17 Parameter Value 18 Parameter Number 18 Parameter Number 19 Pad 19 Parameter Value 21 Pad 21 Parameter Value 22 Parameter Number 22 Parameter Number 23 Pad 23 Parameter Value 24 Parameter Number 24 Parameter Number 25 Pad 25 Parameter Value 26 Parameter Number 26 Parameter Number 27 Pad 27 Parameter Value 28 Parameter Number 28 Parameter Number 29 Pad 29 Parameter Value 30 Parameter Number 30 Parameter Number 31 Pad 31 Parameter Value 32 Parameter Number 32 Parameter Number 33 Pad 33 Parameter Value 34 Parameter Number 34 Parameter Number 20 Parameter Number 35 Parameter Value 62 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Value PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 6 14 Using Explicit Messaging PLC 5 Example Important The PLC 5 must be Series E Rev D 1 or higher to suppor
273. rd UINT Pad word UINT Multiplier UINT Divisor UINT Base INT Offset UDINT Pad BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic name text 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits This value is used in the formulas used to convert the value between display units and internal units Refer to Formulas for Converting on page C 18 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 25 DPI Time Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal Ox9B 155 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of timers in the device Instance 1 is always reserved for a real time clock although a device may not support it The total number of timers can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 Ox43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Real Time Clock Predefined not always supported 0x4400 Ox47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 2 Timer 1 0x4800 Ox4BFF 184
274. rding PCCC commands see DF Protocol and Command Set Manual Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 8 EtherNet IP Objects N Files N File Description N42 This N file lets you read and write some values configuring the port N42 3 Time out read write Time in seconds allowed between messages to the N45 file If the adapter does not receive a message in the specified time it performs the fault action configured in its Comm Flt Action parameter A valid setting is between 1 and 32767 seconds N42 7 Adapter Port Number read only Drive Port 13 in which the adapter resides N42 8 Peer Adapters read only Bit field of devices with peer messaging capabilities N45 This N file lets you read and write control I O messages You can write control I O messages only when all of the following conditions are true e The adapter is not receiving I O from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner e The adapter is not receiving Peer I O from another adapter e The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read N45 0 Logic Command least significant Logic Status least significant N45 1 Logic Command most significant Logic Status most significant N45 2 Reference least significant Feedback least sig
275. ress each node on the EtherNet IP network must have a unique IP address To change an IP address you must set the new value and then remove and reapply power to or reset the adapter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Figure 2 1 i H W EL ce 1 1 1 D 1 2 3 Installing the Adapter Setting the IP Address Switches Hundreds Position Tens Position Ones D Position Fo o Possible Settings Description 000 Adapter will use depending on Parameter 36 BOOTP the BOOTP setting or the adapter parameter settings for the IP address 001 254 Adapter will use the rotary switch settings for the IP address 192 168 1 xxx where xxx rotary switch settings 255 887 Adapter will use depending on Parameter 36 BOOTP the BOOTP setting or the adapter parameter settings for the IP address 888 Resets the adapter IP address function to factory defaults Thereafter the drive must be powered down the switches set to a setting other than 888 and then the drive must be powered up again to accept the new address 889 998 Adapter will use depending on Parameter 36 BOOTP the BOOTP setting or the adapter parameter settings for the IP address 999 Disables the rotary switches Adapter will use depending on Parameter default settings 36
276. roller must first be disabled to allow changes to the respective Datalinks PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 5 6 Using the I O Example Ladder Logic Program Information ControlLogix Example Depending on the controller being used the I O connection can be disabled by Inhibiting the module in RSLogix 5000 Putting the controller in Program mode Placing the scanner in idle mode Disconnecting the drive from the network DeviceLogix Datalinks are also locked while the DeviceLogix program is running The DeviceLogix program must first be disabled to allow changes to the Datalinks Set DeviceLogix parameter 53 DLX Operation to DisableLogic to disable the logic the parameter value will then change to LogicDisabld The example ladder logic programs in the sections of this chapter are intended for and operate PowerFlex 750 Series drives Functions of the Example Programs The example programs enable you to Receive Logic Status information from the drive Send a Logic Command to control the drive for example start stop Send a Reference to the drive and receive Feedback from the drive e e e e Send receive Datalink data to from the drive Logic Command Status Words These examples use the Logic Command word and Logic Status word for PowerFlex 750 Series drives Refer to Appendix D Logic Command Status Words for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives to
277. rs for the Get Attributes Scattered and Set Attributes Scattered object specific service Name Data Type Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter to read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value to read or write zero when reading PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P DPI Fault Object EtherNet IP Objects C 19 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x97 151 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for faults Adapters use this object for events Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of faults or events supported in the queue The maximum number of faults events can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 Ox43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 Port 1 2 Second Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4800 Ox4BFF 18432 19455 Port 2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 Port 4 16385 Most Recent Adapter Event 0x5400 Ox57FF 21504 22527 P
278. rt folder to expand and view its device s various links which take you to related information pages For Port 00 PowerFlex 755 Drive example information pages see Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 and Figure 8 8 Online user manuals link Click this link to view Rockwell Automation s web page with documentation for drives and other devices Software tools Web site link ick this link to view Allen Bradley s web page with information Launch my DriveExplorer software link C about software tools such as DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive C ick this link to launch the DriveExplorer software already installed on your PC Launch my DriveExecutive software link Click this link to launch the DriveExecutive software already installed on your PC E mail technical support link Click this link to view a new e mail message window to send a message to Allen Bradley s Technical Support Team Information on Adapter Home Page The adapter Home Page displays the following information for the host drive and adapter Information for Description Host Drive e Revision e Status e Commanded Direction e Rotation Direction e Process Status EtherNet IP Embedded e IP Address Adapter e Ethernet Address MAC e Serial Number e Adapter Status e O Connection Status PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 8 4 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Process
279. s Data Table Address 9 N45 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow Ethernet messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 D on page 5 15 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 14 3 For N File details see N Files on page C 8 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Configuring the I O 4 35 Creating SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG WRITE 500CPU LOCAL Nxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example N12 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example N12 0 Then press Enter 2 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC Nxx n 13 NXB XIC Nxx n 12 BND OTU Nxx n 15 where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example N11 0 for the message created in Step 1 Importa
280. s Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Number of UINT 1 Members 2 Get Member List ARRAY of STRUCT UINT Size of member data UINT Size of member path Packed Member path EPATH 3 Conditional Data Array of Bits Data to be transferred 4 Get Size UINT Size of assembly data in bits 1 For instance 1 access rule for the data attribute is Get For instance 2 it is Get Set Important Setting an assembly object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 4 EtherNet IP Objects Register Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x07 7 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All I O data being read from the embedded adapter read only 2 All I O data written to the embedded adapter read write 3 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 4 Logic Command and Reference data read write 5 DL To Net 01 input data from embedded adapter to scanner read only 6 DL From Net 01 output data from scanner to embedded adapter read write 35 DL To Net 16 output data from scanner to embedded adapter read write 36 DL From Net 16 input data from embedd
281. s for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Logic Command Word 0 0 cece eect en ee D 1 Logic Status Word 12 23 ten eR laos hash tA Glee EN RR D 2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P iv Table of Contents PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Related Documentation About This Manual Topic Page Related Documentation P 1 Rockwell Automation Support P 2 Conventions Used in This Manual P 2 Preface For Refer to Publication EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Planning and Installation Manual EtherNet IP ENET INOO1 Performance and Application Guide ENET AP001 DriveExplorer http www ab com drives driveexplorer and DriveExplorer online help installed with the software DriveTools SP http www ab com drives drivetools and DriveExecutive includes DriveExecutive online help installed with the software Enhanced PowerFlex Enhanced PowerFlex 7 Class HIM User Manual 20HIM UM001 7 Class HIM PowerFlex 750 Series AC PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drives User Manual 750 UM001 Drives PowerFlex 750 Series Reference Manual 750 RM001 RSLin Classic Getting Results with RSLinx Guide and LINX GR001 online help installed with the software RSLogix 5 RSLogix 5 Getting Results Guide LG5 GR001 RSLogix 500 RSLogix 500 Getting Results Guide LG500 GR001 RSLogix 50
282. sable chips across industrial control products Controller A controller also called programmable logic controller is a solid state control system that has a user programmable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I O control logic timing counting report generation communication arithmetic and data file manipulation A controller consists of a central processor input output interface and memory See also Scanner PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P G 2 Glossary Data Rate The speed at which data is transferred on the EtherNet IP network You can set the adapter to a data rate of 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex or 100Mbps Half Duplex If another device on the network sets or auto negotiates the data rate you can set the adapter to automatically detect the data rate Datalinks A Datalink is a type of pointer used by PowerFlex 750 Series drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow specified parameter value s to be accessed or changed without using explicit messages When enabled each 32 bit Datalink in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive consumes 4 bytes in the input image table and or 4 bytes in the output image table of the controller DriveExplorer Software A tool for monitoring and configuring Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters It can be run on computers
283. sage C EN gt Control MG12 0 DN 5 Setup Screen lt ER 5 MG12 0 MG12 0 Tr US EN 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 4 28 Configuring the I O General Tab Box This PLC 5 Figure 4 32 PLC 5 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command Reference and DL To Net Datalinks MSG MG12 0 2 Elements DER General M iog Ins Add Hop Dd Remove Hop 10 91 100 73 DER Ths PLCS Control Bits Communication Command Ignore if timed os TOY n Data Table Address N20 37 To be retiied NR 0 Size in Elemente Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Post Number Continuous Run CO 0 Erra ER v Target Device Message done DN n Data I able Address N45 0 Message Transmitting ST n Mulier Message Enabled EN 0 Error Enu CodefHex 0 Error Desenption No ers Setting Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write The controller type and command type for the controller to write data to the drive Data Table Address 1 N20 37 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive Size in Elements 36 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the EtherNet IP
284. sses to notify Type in addresses to where you want e mail messages to be sent Multiple addresses can be used but they must be separated by commas comma delimited Subject of e mail message Type in the desired subject text for the e mail message TIP If the IP address of the e mail server is unknown you can contact your IT department or use the DOS window to enter a command to find its IP address A Onthe Windows task bar click Start Run to display the Run window B In the Run window Open field type cmd and click OK to display the DOS window C On the cA command line type nslookup name of e mail server The entry c gt nslookup smtp company com is an example D Press ENTER to display the e mail server IP address see example below The second bottom IP address shown in the DOS window for this example 131 200 165 58 should be typed into the E mail Notification Web Page Figure 8 4 M C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe C gt nslookup smtp rockwell com Non authoritative answer usmkemul1t 5 na home ra int com 131 200 78 12 smtp rockwell com 131 200 165 58 4 Click Save changes Important After configuring E mail Notification it is recommended to protect the settings Otherwise the configuration can be changed anytime the web page is accessed with a browser Use Parameter 53 Web Features to set E mail Cfg Bit 0 value to 0 Disabled to
285. ssigned to adapter Parameter 26 DL To Net 10 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 26 DL To Net 10 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 27 DL To Net 11 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 27 DL To Net 11 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 28 DL To Net 12 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 28 DL To Net 12 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 29 DL To Net 13 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 29 DL To Net 13 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 30 DL To Net 14 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 30 DL To Net 14 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 31 DL To Net 15 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 31 DL To Net 15 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 32 DL To Net 16 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 32 DL To Net 16 MSW N20 37 Logic Command LSW see Appendix D N20 38 Logic Command MSW see Appendix D N20 39 Speed Reference LSW N20 40 Speed Reference MSW N20 41 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 LSW N20 42 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 01 DL From Net 01 MSW N20 43 Value of parameter assigned to adapter Parameter 02 DL From Net 02 LSW N20 44 Value of parameter assi
286. ster Object Msg Fit Action Web pages viewed using a web browser that show information about the embedded EtherNet IP adapter its host drive and DPI devices connected to the drive Configurable e mail messaging to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the embedded EtherNet IP adapter takes a communication or idle fault action Support for DPI routing enabling access to any networked PowerFlex 7 Class drive using DriveExplorer version 6 01 or higher to monitor and configure that drive and its connected peripherals PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Compatible Products Required Equipment Getting Started 1 3 At the time of publication the embedded EtherNet IP adapter is compatible with Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series drives Equipment Shipped with the Drive Since the EtherNet IP adapter is embedded on the Main Control Board in the PowerFlex 755 drive it is always an integral part of the drive and therefore is not shipped with installation instructions User Supplied Equipment To configure the embedded EtherNet IP adapter you must supply C A small flathead screwdriver C Ethernet cable for details refer to the EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual publication ENET INOOI C Ethernet switch for details refer to the EtherNet IP Performance Application Solution publication ENET APOO0I
287. t the MultiHop feature that routes messaging to the drive Important Due to inherent limitations with the PCCC N File method only contiguous multiple parameters can be read or written in one explicit message For explicit messaging the N150 N Files must be used because they are already mapped to specific parameters in the drive and its connected peripherals This enables direct access to any parameter For PCCC N150 N File information refer to page C 9 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of the 32 bit REAL floating point parameter 007 Output Current in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Figure 6 15 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Read Single B3 0 MSG t Read Write Message C EN 5 4 0 Control MG13 0 CDN gt Setup Screen lt CER gt COP Copy File Source N40 0 Dest N40 3 Length 1 COP 1 Copy File Source N40 1 Dest N40 2 Length 1 COP Copy File Source N40 2 Dest F102 0 Length 1 Three COP Copy instructions are required to convert the 16 bit integer data table addresses N40 0 Least Significant Word and N40 1 Most Significant Word to a 32 bit REAL floating point data table address F102 0 for correct presentation The first two COP instructions swap the LSW and MSW and the third COP instruction corre
288. t definitions for PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 1 definition G 5 in O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 controllers 5 3 using 5 4 Logic Src Cfg parameter B 7 M MAC address see hardware address manual conventions P 2 related documentation P 1 web site P 1 Master Slave hierarchy configuring adapter for 3 8 definition G 5 messages see explicit messaging or I O MicroLogix 1100 configuring the I O 4 37 explicit messaging 6 32 limitations when using the I O 4 20 using the I O 5 14 Msg Fit Action parameter B 6 N Net Addr Src parameter B 3 Net Rate Act parameter B 4 Net Rate Cfg parameter B 4 network cable 2 4 network IDs G 4 Non Volatile Storage NVS definition G 5 in adapter 3 1 in drive 5 5 0 objects list of C 1 to C 37 ODVA EtherNet IP specification G 2 P parameters accessing 3 1 convention P 2 list of B 2 to B 9 numbering scheme B 1 restoring to factory default values 3 17 PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command G 5 PCCC object C 6 Peer Flt Action parameter B 5 Peer to Peer hierarchy custom Peer I O to set up master broadcaster 3 11 to set up slave receiver 3 12 definition G 5 simple Peer I O to set up master broadcaster 3 10 to set up slave receiver 3 11 ping G 6 PLC 5 configuring the I O 4 21 explicit messaging 6 14 limitations when using the I O 4 20 using the I O 5 14 Port Number paramet
289. t were written to the requested drive parameters Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 30 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 6 35 Example Scattered Write Response Data File Data File N90 dec TIP To verify that the parameter values were successfully written use the HIM DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive to access the parameters and view their newly written values PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P SLC 500 Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging Using Explicit Messaging The data structures in Figure 6 36 use 32 bit words and can accommodate up to 32 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with Bit 15 set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code Figure 6 36 Data Structures for Scattered Read Write Messages Request Source Data Word 0 Parameter Number LSW Word 0 Parameter Number LSW 1 Parameter Number MSW 2 Parameter Value LSW 3 Parameter Value MSW 4 Parameter Number LSW 5 Parameter Number MSW 6 Parameter Value LSW 7 Parameter Value MSW 8 Parameter Number LSW 9 Parameter Number MSW 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Parame
290. ten Tag 755 Dive Browse Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Path My_PowerFlex_ Configuration Communication Tag Message Type l P Genedc Serice Custom Source Eleneri Scallered Fiead Rec UH Saor Lergh 40 Byles Service Code fa Instance 0 Hex Clas u3 Destination Scattered Flend Me v New Tag Attribute 0 Enable Q Enable Watng Q Stat Eror Code Extended Error Code Error Path Ere Text The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to format a multiple read message Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4d Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Scattered Read Request Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 40 bytes Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered Read Response 4 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My PowerFlex 755 Drive The path is the route that the message will foll
291. ter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number LSW 13 Parameter Number MSW 14 Parameter Value LSW 15 Parameter Value MSW 16 Parameter Number LSW 17 Parameter Number MSW 18 Parameter Value LSW 19 Parameter Value MSW 20 Parameter Number LSW 21 Parameter Number MSW 22 Parameter Value LSW 23 Parameter Value MSW 24 Parameter Number LSW 25 Parameter Number MSW 26 Parameter Value LSW 27 Parameter Value MSW 28 Parameter Number LSW 29 Parameter Number MSW 30 Parameter Value LSW 31 Parameter Value MSW 32 Parameter Number LSW 33 Parameter Number MSW 34 Parameter Value LSW 35 Parameter Value MSW 124 Parameter Number LSW 125 Parameter Number MSW 126 Parameter Value LSW 127 Parameter Value MSW Response Destination Data 1 Parameter Number MSW 2 Parameter Value LSW 3 Parameter Value MSW 4 Parameter Number LSW 5 Parameter Number MSW 6 Parameter Value LSW 7 Parameter Value MSW 8 Parameter Number LSW 9 Parameter Number MSW 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number LSW 13 Parameter Number MSW 14 Parameter Value
292. the parameter by name As an alternate method the parameter value can be set manually by number using this formula To Net Parameter Value 10000 Port Number Origination Parameter Number For example suppose you want to use Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 to read Parameter 2 of an optional I O card plugged into drive Port 4 Using the formula the value for Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 would be 10000 4 2 40002 1 Set the values of only the required number of contiguous Datalink parameters needed to read data from the drive and that are to be included in the network I O connection 2 Reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder The adapter is ready to send output data to the master controller You must now configure the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter Refer to Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Setting the Adapter to Transmit Peer to Peer Data Simple Peer I O Configuration The most common use of Peer I O is to take the Logic Command and Reference from one drive and repeat it over Ethernet to one or more other drives If scaling of the Reference is needed to enable drives to run at different but related speeds use drive Parameter 609 TrmPct RefA Stpt The embedded EtherNet IP adapter provides a simplified configuration method for simple Peer I O Important Because of the 32 bit REAL floating poi
293. the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 125 249 i Number of parameters n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 125 249 i n the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 10 EtherNet IP Objects DPI Device Object Attribute ID 0 Get Name Class Code Hexadecimal 0x92 Services Service Code Ox0E Decimal 146 Implemented for Class Yes Service Name Get_Attribute_Single Instance Yes
294. the example program is shown in Figure 5 10 Note that to describe the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned you may want to add descriptions to the automatically created generic controller tags or create User Defined Data Types UDDT PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using the I O 5 13 Figure 5 10 ControlLogix Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program Using Generic Drive Profile DL_From_Net i DL From Net 01 Stop Mode A 1 Decimal DL From Net 02 Stop Mode B Decimal DL From Net 3 Accel Time 1 Float DL From Met 04 Accel Time 2 Float DL From Net 05 Decel Time 1 Float DL From Net 06 Decel Time 2 Float DL From Net 07 Jog Acc Dec Time 5 Float DL From Net 08 Jog Speed 1 Float DL From Net 09 Jog Speed 2 Float DL From Net 10 Preset Speed 1 Float DL From Net 11 Preset Speed 2 Float DL From Net 12 Preset Speed 3 Float DL From Net 13 Preset Speed 4 Float DL From Net 14 Preset Speed 5 Float DL From Net 15 Preset Speed 5 Float DL From Net 16 Preset Speed 7 Float DL To Net DL To Net 01 Stop Mode DL To Net 02 Stop Mode B DL To Net 03 Accel Time 1 DL To Net 04 Accel Time 2 DL To Net 05 Decel Time 1 DL To Net 06 Decel Time 2 DL To Net 07 Jog Acc Dec Time DL To Net 08 Jog Speed 1 DL To Net 03 Jog Speed 2 DL To Net 10 Preset Speed 1 DL To Net 11 Preset Speed 2 DL To Net 12 Preset Speed 3 DL
295. this Set Defaults procedure Common reasons for a conflict include the drive running or a controller in Run mode 9 Reset the adapter by cycling power to the drive or by using the HIM s Reset Device function located in the drive s DIAGNOSTIC folder The following parameters provide information about the status of the adapter You can view these parameters at any time Parameter Description 34 DLs From Net Act The number of controller to drive Datalinks that are included in the network I O connection controller outputs 35 DLs To Net Act The number of drive to controller Datalinks that are included in the network I O connection controller inputs 37 Net Addr Src Source from which the adapter node address is taken This will be either 0 Switches 1 Parameters which uses the address from Parameters 38 41 IP Addr Cfg x or 2 BOOTP The source is determined by the settings of the IP address switches Figure 2 1 on the adapter 50 Net Rate Act The data rate used by the adapter 86 Fr Peer Status The status of the consumed peer input connection Values 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted 77 DLs Fr Peer Act The number of peer to drive Datalinks that the drive is expecting 88 DLs To Peer Act The number of drive to peer Datalinks that the drive is expecting The adapter can be flash updated over the network or serially through a direct connection from a co
296. tiguous words Least and Most Significant in the controller s I O image Table 5 B shows the I O for a drive using all 32 bit Datalinks Table 5 B PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 I O Image for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 32 bit Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command LSW 0 Logic Status LSW 1 Logic Command MSW 1 Logic Status MSW 2 Reference LSW 2 Feedback LSW 3 Reference MSW 3 Feedback MSW 4 DL From Net 01 LSW 4 DL To Net 01 LSW 5 DL From Net 01 MSW 5 DL To Net 01 MSW 6 DL From Net 02 LSW 6 DL To Net 02 LSW 7 DL From Net 02 MSW 7 DL To Net 02 MSW 8 DL From Net 03 LSW 8 DL To Net 03 LSW 9 DL From Net 03 MSW 9 DL To Net 03 MSW 10 DL From Net 04 LSW 10 DL To Net 04 LSW 11 DL From Net 04 MSW 11 DL To Net 04 MSW 12 DL From Net 05 LSW 12 DL To Net 05 LSW 13 DL From Net 05 MSW 13 DL To Net 05 MSW 14 DL From Net 06 LSW 14 DL To Net 06 LSW 15 DL From Net 06 MSW 15 DL To Net 06 MSW 16 DL From Net 07 LSW 16 DL To Net 07 LSW 17 DL From Net 07 MSW 17 DL To Net 07 MSW 18 DL From Net 08 LSW 18 DL To Net 08 LSW 19 DL From Net 08 MSW 19 DL To Net 08 MSW 20 DL From Net 09 LSW 20 DL To Net 09 LSW 21 DL From Net 09 MSW 21 DL To Net 09 MSW 22 DL From Net 10 LSW 22 DL To Net 10 LSW 23 DL From Net 1
297. times in trans TX frames failing due to excessive collisions TX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer TX error Times of carrier sense condition loss during trans RX frames exceeding the maximum frame size RX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer RX error PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P C 38 EtherNet IP Objects Notes PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Logic Command Word Appendix D Logic Command Status Words for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Appendix D presents the definitions of the Logic Command and Logic Status words that are used for PowerFlex 750 Series drives Logic Bits 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 987 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop X Start 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 1 3 0 Not Jog 1 Par 556 1 Jog 1 x Clear Fault 9 0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault X Unipolar Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Manual 0 Not Manual 1 Manual X Reserved X x Accel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 Par 535 10 Use Accel Tim
298. to the destination tag Scattered Read Response Figure 6 9 shows the parameter values which in this example have been converted using a UDDT for correct presentation COP Copy instructions could have been used for this purpose instead of a UDDT Figure 6 9 Example Scattered Read Response Converted Data Scalleied Read Response Output Frequency Par No Scattered Read Response Output Frequency Par Value gt Scattered Read Response Output Current Par No Scaltered Read Resporie Output Curert Par Value Scattered flend flesponte Output Voltage Pi No Scattered Read Response Output Voltage Par Value Scattered Read Response Output Power Par No Scaltered Read Response Duput Power Pr Value Scattered Read Response DC Bus Volts Par No Scattered Read Response DC Bus Volts Par Value In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value 1 Output Frequency 60 205975 Hz 7 Output Current 12 570678 Amp 8 Output Voltage 418 34348 VAC 9 Output Power 12 3534 kW 11 DC Bus Volts 566 5277 VDC PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 10 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters A Scattered Write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five 32
299. transmitted over the network to the controller These are parameters read by the controller inputs to the controller If setting the value manually the parameter value 10000 port number origination parameter number For example suppose you want to use Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 to read Parameter 01 of an optional I O card plugged into drive Port 4 The value for Parameter 17 DL To Net 01 would be 40001 10000 4 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Details Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required SS DE ODE DE ODE SoS D LU Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Defau Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required DE DE CE ODE DE DE DE DE DE DE OD LU Cc OcOcOocococcococcooococcococzoococc 159999 Read Write No Cc OoOcOcOococococoooococcococzoococc 159999 Read Write No Parameter No Name and Description 33 34 35 36 37 42 43 45 Port Number Displays the drive port to which the embedded EtherNet IP adapter is dedicated This is always Port 13 DLs From Net Act Displays the number of actual controller to drive Datalinks that the drive is using based on the I O connection opened by the controller
300. tribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 111215 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit4 Bit 16 is the least significant bit 17 Extended Data Type Bit 5 E fie i TT used as an array of Boolean 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 010 Reserved y 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 May be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object e Intelligent offline tools make use of the Limits Object to select limits and units 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download _ Parameter shall always be included in uploads and down
301. tting on the network PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 2 6 Installing the Adapter Commissioning the Adapter Configuring Verifying Key Drive Parameters The PowerFlex 755 drive can be separately configured for the control and Reference functions in various combinations For example you could set the drive to have its control come from a peripheral or terminal block with the Reference coming from the network Or you could set the drive to have its control come from the network with the Reference coming from another peripheral or terminal block Or you could set the drive to have both its control and Reference come from the network The following steps in this section assume that the drive will receive the Logic Command and Reference from the network 1 Use drive Parameter 545 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference to Port 13 Reference the drive port dedicated to the embedded EtherNet IP adapter 2 Verify that drive Parameter 930 Speed Ref Source is reporting that the source of the Reference to the drive is Port 13 Reference This ensures that any Reference commanded from the network can be monitored by using drive Parameter 002 Commanded SpdRef If a problem occurs this verification step provides the diagnostic capability to determine whether the drive adapter or the network is the cause 3 If hard wired discrete digital inputs are
302. tus 7 2 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P 7 2 Troubleshooting ENET Status Indicator Status Off Cause The adapter and or network is not powered the adapter is not properly connected to the network or the adapter needs an IP address Corrective Actions e Apply power to the drive and network e Securely connect the adapter to the network using an Ethernet cable e Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector e Set a unique IP address using the adapter switches a BOOTP server or by disabling BOOTP and using adapter parameters Solid Red The adapter failed the duplicate IP address detection test Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power Flashing Red An EtherNet IP connection has timed out e Apply power to the scanner or enable the peer device that will send I O e Check the IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches for correct operation e Check the amount of traffic on the network Flashing Red Green The adapter is performing a self test No action required Flashing Green The adapter is properly connected but is not communicating with any devices on the network e Place the controller in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device that will send I O e Program the controller or peer device to recognize and transmit l O or make a messagin
303. twork and drive They are on the adapter and can be viewed on the front cover of the drive when the drive is powered Subnet Mask An extension to the IP addressing scheme that lets you use a single network ID for multiple physical networks A bit mask identifies the part of the address that specifies the network and the part of the address that specifies the unique node on the network A 1 in the subnet mask indicates the bit is used to specify the network A 0 in the subnet mask indicates that the bit is used to specify the node For example a subnet mask on a network may appear as follows 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 255 255 255 192 This PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Glossary G 7 mask indicates that 26 bits are used to identify the network and 6 bits are used to identify devices on each network Instead of a single physical Class C network with 254 devices this subnet mask divides it into four networks with up to 62 devices each Switches Network devices that provide virtual connections that help to control collisions and reduce traffic on the network They are able to reduce network congestion by transmitting packets to an individual port only if they are destined for the connected device In a control application in which real time data access is critical network switches may be required in place of hubs TCP Transmission Control Proto
304. ue was successfully written use the HIM DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive to access the parameter and view its newly written value PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 18 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Example PLC 5 Reading Writing Multiple Parameters You can read or write only contiguous parameters Scattered read write messaging is not supported Also the range of contiguous parameters must be contained in the same N File Two elements words are required for each parameter being read or written For example to read 5 contiguous parameters 10 elements words must be used When using RSLogix 500 v7 10 or lower explicit messaging must be performed using the PCCC N File method For RSLogix 500 v7 20 or higher the CIP messaging method has been added along with the PCCC N File method However it is recommended to use the CIP method because it is easier to use and understand For this reason only instructions for the CIP method are provided If you must use the PCCC N File method refer to the PLC 5 Example on page 6 14 The CIP messaging method provides a Generic Get Set Attribute Service which can be used to perform single parameter read or write and multiple parameter read or write explicit messages Also the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive s Non Volatile Storage NVS or the drive s Random Access Memory RAM
305. ueue page for the Port 13 device the embedded EtherNet IP adapter Figure 8 6 Example of Port 00 PowerFlex 755 Drive Module Information Page F Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer Allen Bradley oe ane Rockwell Expand Minimize Home D Process display D TCP IP configurati Configure e mail n Browse devices Gi Port 0 PowerFl Module inform 2 Diagnostics D Fault queue D Alarm queue Gi Port 1 Not Ava G Port 2 1203 SS Ca Port 3 20 HIM Gi Port 4 Not Ava Gi Port 5 Not Ava Gi Port 6 Not Ava Gi Port 7 Not Ava Gi Port 8 Not Ava Gi Port 9 Not Ava Ca Port 10 Not Av Ci Port 11 Not Av Ca Port 12 Not Av Ca Port 13 EtherN Ci Port 14 Devicel Online user manu O Software tools We Launch my Drive IS Launch my DriveE 2 E mail technical s Automation Product Text PowerFlex 755 Vendor ID 1 Device Type 0x008F Cod 0x0890 1 006 Status Faulted Copyright 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Information Description Product Text Text identifying the device Vendor ID 1 Allen Bradley Device Type 0x008F 143 decimal Product Code Code for the product name and its rating Revision Firmware revision used by the device Serial Number Serial number of the device Status Operating status of the device for example faulted PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001
306. urce USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRING 16 Fault text STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL O 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used UINT Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of UINT Fault code STRUCT of Fault source USINT DPI port USINT DPI Device Object STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL O 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 2 Get International Fault Text STRINGN Text describing the fault with support for Unicode PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P DPI Alarm Object EtherNet IP Objects C 21 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x98 152 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for alarms or warnings Adapters do not support this object Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of alarms supported by the queue The maximum number of alarms can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host Drive 0 Class Attributes
307. user configurable alarm condition exists but the drive continues to run Red Flashing A major fault has occurred Drive will stop Drive cannot be started until fault condition is cleared Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Red Yellow Flashing Alternately A minor fault has occurred Use drive parameter 950 Minor Flt Config to enable If not enabled acts like a major fault When running the drive continues to run System is brought to a stop under system control The fault must be cleared to continue Yellow Green Flashing Alternately When running a type 1 alarm exists Green Red Flashing Alternately Drive is flash updating Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter Status Indicators ENET Unit Off Adapter and or network is not powered adapter is not properly connected to the network or adapter needs an IP address Red Flashing An EtherNet IP connection has timed out Steady Adapter failed the duplicate IP address detection test Red Green Flashing Alternately Adapter is performing a self test Green Flashing Adapter is properly connected but is not communicating with any devices on the network Steady Adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network LINK Unlit Off Adapter is not powered or is not transmitting on the network Green Flashing Adapter is properly connected and transmitting data packets on the network Steady Adapter is properly connected but is not transmi
308. view details Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Add On Drive Profiles v16 or higher Since the Add On Drive Profile automatically created descriptive controller tags Figure 4 13 for the entire I O image in Chapter 4 you can use these tags to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView etc to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive user defined Program tags Figure 5 1 and a ladder logic program that will pass the Controller tag data to the Program tags PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using the I O 5 7 Figure 5 1 ControlLogix Program Tags for Integrated Drive Profile Ladder Logic Program Example E Status_Reverse Status_Ready Status_Forward Status_Faulted _ Status At Speed Status Active Speed Reference Speed Feedback Command Stop Command Start Command Jog Command Forward Reverse Command Clear Faults Data Type o BOOL o BOOL o BOOL o BOOL 2 BOOL o BOOL 0 0 REAL 0 0 REAL o BOOL 2 BOOL o BOOL 2 BOOL 2 BOOL An example ladder logic program that uses the automatically created descriptive Controller tags and passes their data to the user defined Program tags is shown in Figure 5 2 and Figure 5 3 Note that the prefix for the drive Controller tags is determined by the
309. ways 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units Refer to Formulas for Converting on page C 18 8 Do NOT continually write parameter data to NVS Refer to the attention on page 6 1 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P C 16 EtherNet IP Objects Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 eea B01 LINT used ax anarap Bode dE Rala Ype its 010 USINT 8 bit integer i 011 UINT 16 bit integer 100 UDINT 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not Unicode or 16 bits Unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 unsigned 1 signed 4 Hidden 0 visible 1 hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 May be the sink end of a link 1 May not be the sink end of a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled e g drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask at
310. werFlex 750 Series Drives 32 bit Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks DINT Output I O DINT Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad 1 Reference 1 Logic Status 2 DL From Net 01 2 Feedback 3 DL From Net 02 3 DL To Net 01 4 DL From Net 03 4 DL To Net 02 5 DL From Net 04 5 DL To Net 03 6 DL From Net 05 6 DL To Net 04 7 DL From Net 06 7 DL To Net 05 8 DL From Net 07 8 DL To Net 06 9 DL From Net 08 9 DL To Net 07 10 DL From Net 09 10 DL To Net 08 11 DL From Net 10 11 DL To Net 09 12 DL From Net 11 12 DL To Net 10 13 DL From Net 12 13 DL To Net 11 14 DL From Net 13 14 DL To Net 12 15 DL From Net 14 15 DL To Net 13 16 DL From Net 15 16 DL To Net 14 17 DL From Net 16 17 DL To Net 15 mM 18 DL To Net 16 1 This is on y required when the Generic Profile is used The Add On Profile automatically accounts for this and therefore hides the Pad in the I O input image PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Using the I O 5 3 PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 Controller Image The I O image for the PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 controller changes depending on how many of the drive s sixteen 32 bit Datalinks are used TIP Since PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 controllers are 16 bit devices each 32 bit word for the Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and any used Datalinks will consume two con
311. write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five 32 bit REAL floating point parameters in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Write Value 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 575 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 576 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 571 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 6 26 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 6 31 Example Ladder Logic Explicit Messaging Program for Write Multiple r COP Copy File Source Dest Length COP Copy File Source Dest Length F105 0 N101 0 gt N101 0 N100 3 1 COP Copy File Source Dest Length r COP Copy File Source Dest Length N101 1 N100 2 1 F105 1 N101 2 gt COP PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UM001A EN P Copy File Source Dest Length COP Copy File Source Dest Length r COP Copy File Source Dest Length r COP J Copy File Source Dest Length COP Copy File Source Dest Length r COP Copy File Source Dest Length r COP Copy File Source Dest Length COP Copy File Source Dest Length N101 2 N100 7 1 N101 3 N100 6 1 F10
312. x 755 Drive l Data 8 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 3 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 10 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 11 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 12 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 13 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 14 EH My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 15 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 15 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 17 My PowerFlex 755 Drive l Data 18 DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT DL To Net 03 DL To Net 04 DL To Net 05 DL To Net 06 DL To Net 07 DL To Net 08 DL To Net 09 DL To Net 10 DL To Net 11 DL To Net 12 DL To Net 13 DL To Net 14 DL To Net 15 DL To Net 16 Figure 4 23 Output Image Controller Tags My PowerFlex 755 Drive My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data AB ETHERNET DINT 18 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 0 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 1 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 2 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 3 My PowerFles 755 Drive D Data 4 DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT _ Logic Command Speed Reference DL From Net 01 DL From Net 02 DL From Net 03 My PowerFles 755 Drive D Data 5 My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 5 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 7 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 8 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data S My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 10 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 11 My PowerFlex 755 Drive O Data 12 My PowerFlex 755 Drive D Data 13 My PowerFlex 755 Drive
313. xx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG10 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG10 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG10 0 for the message created in Step 2 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 750COM UMO001A EN P 4 40 Configuring the I O General Tab Box Setting In the MSG instruction Figure 4 43 double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 44 Figure 4 43 MicroLogix 1100 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG10 0 Setup Screen lt MG10 0 MG10 0 CU DN EN MG10 0 ER Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen Figure 4 44 MicroLogix 1100 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout ic MSG MG10 0 1 Elements Del Remove Hon From Poet Channel 1 To Address Type EtherNet IP Device str To Address 10 91 100 79 This

PowerFlex® 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PowerFlex&reg; 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PowerFlex® 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter